<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Pamm</id>
	<title>Epiphany - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Pamm"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php/Special:Contributions/Pamm"/>
	<updated>2026-10-24T10:58:29Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.46.2</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1287</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1287"/>
		<updated>2026-05-27T21:01:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Sales Order */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Close Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – Changes &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; flag to True on all Order Lines without impacting inventory counts and drops lines off open order lines report and open orders if all lines are closed&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – generates a back order report showing what has shipped and what hasn&#039;t shipped&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Order Hold===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Hold Open check box on the Order Screen is for filtering purposes. The Open Orders Report and the Purchase Orders List Report allow for filtering on orders that have the ‘Hold Open’ field on the Order checked allowing fulfilled orders to remain on these reports as if they were open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1286</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1286"/>
		<updated>2026-05-27T21:01:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Sales Order */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Close Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – Changes &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; flag to True on all Order Lines without impacting inventory counts and drops lines off open order lines report and open orders if all lines are closed. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – generates a back order report showing what has shipped and what hasn&#039;t shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Order Hold===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Hold Open check box on the Order Screen is for filtering purposes. The Open Orders Report and the Purchase Orders List Report allow for filtering on orders that have the ‘Hold Open’ field on the Order checked allowing fulfilled orders to remain on these reports as if they were open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Payable&amp;diff=1285</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Payable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Payable&amp;diff=1285"/>
		<updated>2026-05-27T21:00:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Purchase Order */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Payable=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Purchase Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory PO / Purchase Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Order From&#039;&#039;&#039; company&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Ship To&#039;&#039;&#039; company &lt;br /&gt;
::*If blank, defaults to your organization’s address displayed on the Main tab (Ship To fields will be blank on Order)&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; to choose Order (inserts Ref PO#)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase Order Lines&#039;&#039;&#039; and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates Accounts Receivable invoice for customer in &#039;&#039;&#039;Ship To&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; (start with empty record) – creates a purchase order from an order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Receive PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – receive items on Purchase Order into Inventory – creates an unassigned receipt; when invoice is received and entered, it relieves the unassigned receipt&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Close PO&#039;&#039;&#039; Changes &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; flag to True on all Purchase Order Lines without impacting inventory counts&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; generates a back order report showing what has shipped and what hasn&#039;t shipped&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entering an Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AP / AP Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
{{EpiphanyHelpText|Screen|4}}&lt;br /&gt;
:1.	Select [[File:Add.png]] from the Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	To Select from an existing Purchase Order, click [[File:Select_PO.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Information will auto-populate from existing Purchase order and fields can be updated as necessary, OR enter invoice manually:&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Date (typically the date of the Invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Vendor’s Name (if name doesn’t exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Address will automatically populate, if different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. Pay To field is auto-populated; however, if paid by Credit Card, then remove default Company and enter Credit Card Company&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Sup Inv# – Invoice number appearing on Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Terms – default (change if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
:::i. Due date defaults to current date, but can be changed as needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::j. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::k. Enter or select Account then tab through Line Desc (auto-populated)&lt;br /&gt;
:::l. Unit price may auto-populate, but can be updated as needed (tab through Line Desc, and Price fields)&lt;br /&gt;
:::m. Enter any pertinent comments&lt;br /&gt;
:::n. Save&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Verify the total on the screen matches the total on the Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:Create RMA – creates an RMA for the purchase order displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search for Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click RMA (assigns RMA #)&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Review Purchase Order Line information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt – actual receiving of product from a BOL/packing slip&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1.	Search to find Order&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create RMA – creates an RMA for the purchase order displayed&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Search for Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Click RMA (assigns RMA #)&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Review Purchase Order Line information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Select/Approve AP Invoices====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; AP / Pay Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select unpaid AP invoices to be approved/paid by clicking on the invoice line. (To deselect, click the invoice line again).&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Once all invoices to be approved have been selected, click [[File:ApprovalScreen.png]] in the lower right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create Payments==== &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; AP / Prepare Checks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1.  The AP Payment Approval screen shows all invoices selected to be paid and invoices needing approval before being paid.&lt;br /&gt;
::a. To remove an invoice, select the invoice to be removed and click [[File:RemoveSelected.png]]. This will remove the invoice line and move it back to the Pay AP Invoices screen (unpaid invoices).&lt;br /&gt;
::b. The total amount due of all the invoices approved will display at the bottom right of this screen. If an invoice is removed the total will be adjusted accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
:2.  Click [[File:CreatePayments.png]] to create checks for these invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
:3.  The following pop-up will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:PrintChecksPopUp.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039; to open the check print dialog box and print the checks (see &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Checks&#039;&#039;&#039; section below).&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039; to create the payments without printing a physical check.                                                                        &lt;br /&gt;
:::i. These payments will be added to the Check Entry Table and can be printed any time.&lt;br /&gt;
:::ii. The Check Entry Table can be viewed by going to the following menu location: AP / Check Entry/Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Print Checks====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; AP / AP Reports / Print Checks  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Print Physical Checks=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:PrintChecksDialog.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::1.  Select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print Checks&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; radio button&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  Enter Account&lt;br /&gt;
::3.  Enter starting check number (in the case of payments that do not have a physical check number attached to them, such as ACH and online payments, unique custom check numbers should be used)&lt;br /&gt;
::4.  Load printer with stock&lt;br /&gt;
::5.  Click Print  &lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Upon clicking Print the GL postings and journal entries take place and the check status on the check records changes to P&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. To see a preview of the check click Preview. This will not print the check, post to GL, create the journal entries, or alter the check status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Make An Online Payment=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:PrintDialogO.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::1.  Select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Online Payment&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; radio button&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  Enter Account&lt;br /&gt;
::3.  Enter starting check number&lt;br /&gt;
::4.  Click Post&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Create An Automated Clearing House (ACH) File=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:PrintDialogACH.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::1.  Select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ACH File&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; radio button&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  Enter Account&lt;br /&gt;
::3.  Starting check number - OPTIONAL. If using check numbers for ACH, the first check number must start with a number of 10 or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
::4.  Click Create&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reprint A Check===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AP / Check Entry/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.  Find Check Number to be reprinted&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  Click Re-Print button&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Check Status will change to “R” for Reprint&lt;br /&gt;
::3.  Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AP / AP Reports / Print Checks&lt;br /&gt;
::4.  Change Check Status to “R”&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:PrintChecksR.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::5.  If paying from a non-standard checking GL account, enter the Account Number&lt;br /&gt;
::6.  Enter the Check Number from the physical check in the printer&lt;br /&gt;
::7.  Change Date if the check date is not today’s date&lt;br /&gt;
::8.  Click Print – In addition to printing the checks, the Check Printing process changes the Epiphany Database in the following ways:&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Check Status is changed to “P” for Printed&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The Check Number of the check is assigned&lt;br /&gt;
:::*A Journal Entry is created removing dollars from Cash GL account, and balancing with the Check Distribution amount on the check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reprint a Check Stub Notification for an Employee===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Locaton:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Applications / Insight Reporting / Accounts Payable / Payment Notification&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Navigate to the Payment Notification Report&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Enter the Check Number of the check stub to reprint.&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Print or Save Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Void A Check===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AP / Check Entry/Edit  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Find Check Number to be Voided&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Void Check button  &lt;br /&gt;
::*Check status will change to “V” for Void&lt;br /&gt;
::*A Journal Entry is created to reverse the distributed amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Entry/Edit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; AP / Check Entry/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Check Entry/Edit screen is where check information can be entered and edited (when there is no AP Invoice). This screen also displays additional check information such as the check stub lines, check status, and the distributed amount of the check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter A Check:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.  Click [[File:Add3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  Enter a check number&lt;br /&gt;
::3.  Select Person and/or Company (Lines below will autofill with the name and addresses attached to this Person or Company)&lt;br /&gt;
::4.  Enter account number&lt;br /&gt;
::5.  Enter distributed amount by entering the account number to be applied to and amount&lt;br /&gt;
::6.  Enter note for check stub lines (Optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::7.  Click [[File:Save.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Editing Check Information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.  To edit check, click the [[File:Edit.png]] button, enter in the relevant check information, and then click the [[File:Save.png]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  To cancel an edit click the [[File:CancelEdit.png]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check Statuses:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*R = Reprint (edit check and change status to R to reprint, or click the [[File:Re-Print.png]] button)&lt;br /&gt;
::**A check with the status of ‘R’ will no longer be editable as it has been printed.&lt;br /&gt;
::*X = Unprinted Check(check has not been printed yet)&lt;br /&gt;
::*P = Printed(check has been printed)&lt;br /&gt;
::**A check with the status of ‘P’ will no longer be editable as it has been printed.&lt;br /&gt;
::**If Account Number is blank or Distributed Amount table has no entries, the check will not be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
::*V = Voided(edit check and change status to V to void check, or click the [[File:VoidCheck.png]] button)&lt;br /&gt;
::**A check with the status of ‘V’ will no longer be editable as it has been voided.&lt;br /&gt;
::*O = Online&lt;br /&gt;
::**Online checks produce a file instead of a physical check when printed. The file location can be set/found in defaults on the ‘Checks’ tab in the ‘ACH File Path’ field.&lt;br /&gt;
::*A = ACH&lt;br /&gt;
::**ACH checks produce a file instead of a physical check when printed. The file location can be set/found in defaults on the ‘Checks’ tab in the ‘ACH File Path’ field.&lt;br /&gt;
::*Cleared Flag – Indicates when check has cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Purchase Orders (Inventory / Inventory PO / Purchase Order or Open Purchase Orders) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*AP Aging &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*See Insight Reporting for all available AP Reports &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Payable&amp;diff=1284</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Payable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Payable&amp;diff=1284"/>
		<updated>2026-05-27T20:59:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Purchase Order */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Payable=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Purchase Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory PO / Purchase Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Order From&#039;&#039;&#039; company&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Ship To&#039;&#039;&#039; company &lt;br /&gt;
::*If blank, defaults to your organization’s address displayed on the Main tab (Ship To fields will be blank on Order)&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; to choose Order (inserts Ref PO#)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase Order Lines&#039;&#039;&#039; and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates Accounts Receivable invoice for customer in &#039;&#039;&#039;Ship To&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; (start with empty record) – creates a purchase order from an order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Receive PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – receive items on Purchase Order into Inventory – creates an unassigned receipt; when invoice is received and entered, it relieves the unassigned receipt&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Close PO&#039;&#039;&#039; Changes Close OR flag to True on all Purchase Order Lines without impacting inventory counts&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; generates a back order report showing what has shipped and what hasn&#039;t shipped&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Entering an Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AP / AP Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
{{EpiphanyHelpText|Screen|4}}&lt;br /&gt;
:1.	Select [[File:Add.png]] from the Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	To Select from an existing Purchase Order, click [[File:Select_PO.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Information will auto-populate from existing Purchase order and fields can be updated as necessary, OR enter invoice manually:&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Date (typically the date of the Invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Vendor’s Name (if name doesn’t exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Address will automatically populate, if different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. Pay To field is auto-populated; however, if paid by Credit Card, then remove default Company and enter Credit Card Company&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Sup Inv# – Invoice number appearing on Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Terms – default (change if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
:::i. Due date defaults to current date, but can be changed as needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::j. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::k. Enter or select Account then tab through Line Desc (auto-populated)&lt;br /&gt;
:::l. Unit price may auto-populate, but can be updated as needed (tab through Line Desc, and Price fields)&lt;br /&gt;
:::m. Enter any pertinent comments&lt;br /&gt;
:::n. Save&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Verify the total on the screen matches the total on the Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:Create RMA – creates an RMA for the purchase order displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search for Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click RMA (assigns RMA #)&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Review Purchase Order Line information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt – actual receiving of product from a BOL/packing slip&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1.	Search to find Order&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create RMA – creates an RMA for the purchase order displayed&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Search for Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Click RMA (assigns RMA #)&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Review Purchase Order Line information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Select/Approve AP Invoices====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; AP / Pay Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select unpaid AP invoices to be approved/paid by clicking on the invoice line. (To deselect, click the invoice line again).&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Once all invoices to be approved have been selected, click [[File:ApprovalScreen.png]] in the lower right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create Payments==== &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; AP / Prepare Checks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1.  The AP Payment Approval screen shows all invoices selected to be paid and invoices needing approval before being paid.&lt;br /&gt;
::a. To remove an invoice, select the invoice to be removed and click [[File:RemoveSelected.png]]. This will remove the invoice line and move it back to the Pay AP Invoices screen (unpaid invoices).&lt;br /&gt;
::b. The total amount due of all the invoices approved will display at the bottom right of this screen. If an invoice is removed the total will be adjusted accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
:2.  Click [[File:CreatePayments.png]] to create checks for these invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
:3.  The following pop-up will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:PrintChecksPopUp.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039; to open the check print dialog box and print the checks (see &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Checks&#039;&#039;&#039; section below).&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039; to create the payments without printing a physical check.                                                                        &lt;br /&gt;
:::i. These payments will be added to the Check Entry Table and can be printed any time.&lt;br /&gt;
:::ii. The Check Entry Table can be viewed by going to the following menu location: AP / Check Entry/Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Print Checks====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; AP / AP Reports / Print Checks  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Print Physical Checks=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:PrintChecksDialog.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::1.  Select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print Checks&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; radio button&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  Enter Account&lt;br /&gt;
::3.  Enter starting check number (in the case of payments that do not have a physical check number attached to them, such as ACH and online payments, unique custom check numbers should be used)&lt;br /&gt;
::4.  Load printer with stock&lt;br /&gt;
::5.  Click Print  &lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Upon clicking Print the GL postings and journal entries take place and the check status on the check records changes to P&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. To see a preview of the check click Preview. This will not print the check, post to GL, create the journal entries, or alter the check status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Make An Online Payment=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:PrintDialogO.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::1.  Select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Online Payment&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; radio button&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  Enter Account&lt;br /&gt;
::3.  Enter starting check number&lt;br /&gt;
::4.  Click Post&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Create An Automated Clearing House (ACH) File=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:PrintDialogACH.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::1.  Select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ACH File&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; radio button&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  Enter Account&lt;br /&gt;
::3.  Starting check number - OPTIONAL. If using check numbers for ACH, the first check number must start with a number of 10 or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
::4.  Click Create&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reprint A Check===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AP / Check Entry/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.  Find Check Number to be reprinted&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  Click Re-Print button&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Check Status will change to “R” for Reprint&lt;br /&gt;
::3.  Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AP / AP Reports / Print Checks&lt;br /&gt;
::4.  Change Check Status to “R”&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:PrintChecksR.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::5.  If paying from a non-standard checking GL account, enter the Account Number&lt;br /&gt;
::6.  Enter the Check Number from the physical check in the printer&lt;br /&gt;
::7.  Change Date if the check date is not today’s date&lt;br /&gt;
::8.  Click Print – In addition to printing the checks, the Check Printing process changes the Epiphany Database in the following ways:&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Check Status is changed to “P” for Printed&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The Check Number of the check is assigned&lt;br /&gt;
:::*A Journal Entry is created removing dollars from Cash GL account, and balancing with the Check Distribution amount on the check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reprint a Check Stub Notification for an Employee===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Locaton:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Applications / Insight Reporting / Accounts Payable / Payment Notification&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Navigate to the Payment Notification Report&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Enter the Check Number of the check stub to reprint.&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Print or Save Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Void A Check===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AP / Check Entry/Edit  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Find Check Number to be Voided&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Void Check button  &lt;br /&gt;
::*Check status will change to “V” for Void&lt;br /&gt;
::*A Journal Entry is created to reverse the distributed amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Check Entry/Edit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; AP / Check Entry/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Check Entry/Edit screen is where check information can be entered and edited (when there is no AP Invoice). This screen also displays additional check information such as the check stub lines, check status, and the distributed amount of the check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter A Check:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.  Click [[File:Add3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  Enter a check number&lt;br /&gt;
::3.  Select Person and/or Company (Lines below will autofill with the name and addresses attached to this Person or Company)&lt;br /&gt;
::4.  Enter account number&lt;br /&gt;
::5.  Enter distributed amount by entering the account number to be applied to and amount&lt;br /&gt;
::6.  Enter note for check stub lines (Optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::7.  Click [[File:Save.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Editing Check Information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.  To edit check, click the [[File:Edit.png]] button, enter in the relevant check information, and then click the [[File:Save.png]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
::2.  To cancel an edit click the [[File:CancelEdit.png]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check Statuses:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*R = Reprint (edit check and change status to R to reprint, or click the [[File:Re-Print.png]] button)&lt;br /&gt;
::**A check with the status of ‘R’ will no longer be editable as it has been printed.&lt;br /&gt;
::*X = Unprinted Check(check has not been printed yet)&lt;br /&gt;
::*P = Printed(check has been printed)&lt;br /&gt;
::**A check with the status of ‘P’ will no longer be editable as it has been printed.&lt;br /&gt;
::**If Account Number is blank or Distributed Amount table has no entries, the check will not be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
::*V = Voided(edit check and change status to V to void check, or click the [[File:VoidCheck.png]] button)&lt;br /&gt;
::**A check with the status of ‘V’ will no longer be editable as it has been voided.&lt;br /&gt;
::*O = Online&lt;br /&gt;
::**Online checks produce a file instead of a physical check when printed. The file location can be set/found in defaults on the ‘Checks’ tab in the ‘ACH File Path’ field.&lt;br /&gt;
::*A = ACH&lt;br /&gt;
::**ACH checks produce a file instead of a physical check when printed. The file location can be set/found in defaults on the ‘Checks’ tab in the ‘ACH File Path’ field.&lt;br /&gt;
::*Cleared Flag – Indicates when check has cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Purchase Orders (Inventory / Inventory PO / Purchase Order or Open Purchase Orders) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*AP Aging &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*See Insight Reporting for all available AP Reports &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1283</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1283"/>
		<updated>2026-05-27T20:52:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Accounts Receivable */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Close Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – Changes &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; flag to True on all Order Lines without impacting inventory counts and drops lines off open order lines report and open orders if all lines are closed. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – generates a back order report showing what has shipped and wasn&#039;t hasn&#039;t shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Order Hold===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Hold Open check box on the Order Screen is for filtering purposes. The Open Orders Report and the Purchase Orders List Report allow for filtering on orders that have the ‘Hold Open’ field on the Order checked allowing fulfilled orders to remain on these reports as if they were open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1282</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1282"/>
		<updated>2026-05-27T20:45:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Accounts Receivable */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Close Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – Changes &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; flag to True on all Order Lines without impacting inventory counts and drops lines off open order lines report and open orders if all lines are closed. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – generates a back order number and report for the order lines not yet shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Order Hold===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Hold Open check box on the Order Screen is for filtering purposes. The Open Orders Report and the Purchase Orders List Report allow for filtering on orders that have the ‘Hold Open’ field on the Order checked allowing fulfilled orders to remain on these reports as if they were open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1281</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1281"/>
		<updated>2026-05-27T20:15:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Sales Order */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Close Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – Changes &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; flag to True on all Order Lines without impacting inventory counts and drops lines off open order lines report and open orders if all lines are closed. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – generates a back order number for the order lines not yet shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Order Hold===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Hold Open check box on the Order Screen is for filtering purposes. The Open Orders Report and the Purchase Orders List Report allow for filtering on orders that have the ‘Hold Open’ field on the Order checked allowing fulfilled orders to remain on these reports as if they were open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1280</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1280"/>
		<updated>2026-05-27T20:14:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Accounts Receivable */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Close Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – Changes &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; flag to True on all Order lines without impacting inventory counts and drops lines off open order lines report and open orders if all are closed. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – generates a back order number for the order lines not yet shipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Order Hold===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Hold Open check box on the Order Screen is for filtering purposes. The Open Orders Report and the Purchase Orders List Report allow for filtering on orders that have the ‘Hold Open’ field on the Order checked allowing fulfilled orders to remain on these reports as if they were open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=HowTo:Setup_ACH&amp;diff=1279</id>
		<title>HowTo:Setup ACH</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=HowTo:Setup_ACH&amp;diff=1279"/>
		<updated>2025-10-13T19:10:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The first step in the process is to fill out the [[Screens:Bank Info|“Bank Info”]] record. We have already started entering this information for you. In the menu under General Ledger--&amp;gt;Bank Info you will find the screen being discussed. You will need to enter the bank’s routing and account numbers. Please verify the rest of the information on this screen is correct. Especially the chart account attached. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next step is to enter the bank routing and account information for each person or company that will be included in ACH transfer. Both person and company have ACH information accessible on the “Accounting Defaults” (Acct Defaults) screen / tab accordingly. Notice many companies have a procedure that determines how this ACH data is shared and between partners and staff. The purpose is to protect from unauthorized changes to account info. Many companies call to confirm modifications as an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the ACH Payments checkbox are checked, and bank account information for employees and/or companies are entered in, we are ready to produce an ACH file to send to the bank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For Payroll:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When company is ready to create payroll checks, the user will go to ‘Create Payroll Checks’ under the Payroll menu.  During this process, a check will be created and if the employee has ‘ACH Payments’ checked on their Person screen (with bank account info entered), the ‘Status’ on the check will be an ‘A’.  The ACH checks are ready to be printed to file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an employee would prefer their payroll stubs to go to a personal email address instead of their work email (on Person Tab), go to the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Person - Addresses&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; screen and enter the employee&#039;s &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Personal Email&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; address. Then go to the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Person - Accounting Defaults&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; screen (the Account Defaults Tab on the Person record) and check the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Payment Email&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; check box and select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rel Type = Personal&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. Be sure the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ACH Payments&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; check box is selected, and the employee&#039;s bank account information appears in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;AP Bank Account&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For AP Invoice payments:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When company is ready to pay AP invoices, the user will go to the ‘Pay AP invoices’ screen to select the invoices to pay.  User will be directed to the ‘Approval’ screen and clicking on the ‘Create Payments’ button the process will create a check and if that person or company has ‘ACH Payments’ checked on their Person screen (with bank account info entered), the ‘Status’ on the check will be an ‘A’.  The ACH checks are ready to be printed to file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For AR Invoice payments:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a company is ready to pay AR invoices, the user will go to the ‘Pay AR invoices’ screen to select the invoices to pay.  The user will select ‘ACH file’ from the ‘Payment Type’ dropdown.  When all invoices are selected the user will click on the ‘Record Payment’ button.  The process will create AR Receipts that will have a Payment Type of ‘ACH File’.  The ACH checks are ready to be printed to file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create ACH file from AP checks :&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When ACH file is ready to be created, the user will go to the ‘Print Checks’ screen.  The user will select either CCD ACH File or PPD ACH File.  CCD is for payments to companies (most AP invoice payments).  PPD is for payments to individuals (employees).  Make sure the Account and Date is correct and click on ‘Create’.  The user will be presented with a Save File Dialog for file location and once the user selected ‘OK’ it will create the ACH file in the selected directory.  Manually send this file to the bank through the bank’s website or portal.  Epiphany does not automatically send an ACH file to the bank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create ACH file from AR receipts:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the ACH file is ready to be created, the user will select ‘ACH Banking Utility’ under the AR menu.  Make sure the ‘Effective Date’ is correct and click the ‘Execute’ button.  The user will be presented with a Save File Dialog for file location and once the user selected ‘OK’ it will create the ACH file in the selected directory.  Manually send this file to the bank through the bank’s website or portal.  Epiphany does not automatically send an ACH file to the bank.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1278</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1278"/>
		<updated>2025-09-22T20:48:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Order Hold */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Order Hold===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Hold Open check box on the Order Screen is for filtering purposes. The Open Orders Report and the Purchase Orders List Report allow for filtering on orders that have the ‘Hold Open’ field on the Order checked allowing fulfilled orders to remain on these reports as if they were open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1277</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1277"/>
		<updated>2025-09-22T20:45:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Order Hold===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check the Hold Open check box on the Order Screen to put an order on hold. The Open Orders Report and the Purchase Orders List Report allow for filtering on orders that have the ‘Hold Open’ field on the Order checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1276</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1276"/>
		<updated>2025-09-22T19:19:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Order Hold */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Order Hold===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check the Hold Open check box on the Order Screen to put an order on hold (order will not be filled until check is removed). The Open Orders Report and the Purchase Orders List Report allow for filtering on orders that have the ‘Hold Open’ field on the Order checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1275</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1275"/>
		<updated>2025-09-22T19:19:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Accounts Receivable */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Order Hold===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check the Hold Open check box on the Order Screen to put an order on hold (order will not be filled until check is removed). The Open Orders Report and the Purchase Orders List Report allow for filtering on orders that have the ‘Hold Open’ field on the Order checked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=HowTo:Filter_On_Null_Records&amp;diff=1274</id>
		<title>HowTo:Filter On Null Records</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=HowTo:Filter_On_Null_Records&amp;diff=1274"/>
		<updated>2025-04-07T20:23:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When filtering on a screen, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;=&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NULL&#039;&#039;&#039; fields are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;=&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used when the field is a text input field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NULL&#039;&#039;&#039; is used when the field is a related record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on a text input field:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click the field you want to filter on and select Filter By. The Filter Screen appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Use Condition equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;=&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Search Value is empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on a related field:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click the field you want to filter on and select Filter By. The Filter Screen appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Change the Condition from &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;=&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NULL&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Search Value is empty.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=HowTo:Filter_On_Null_Records&amp;diff=1273</id>
		<title>HowTo:Filter On Null Records</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=HowTo:Filter_On_Null_Records&amp;diff=1273"/>
		<updated>2025-04-07T20:10:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When filtering on a screen, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;=&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NULL&#039;&#039;&#039; fields are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;=&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used when the field is a text input field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NULL&#039;&#039;&#039; is used when the field is a related record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on a text input field:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click the field you want to filter on and select Filter By. The Filter Screen appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Use Condition equal to &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;=&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on a related field:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click the field you want to filter on and select Filter By. The Filter Screen appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Change the Condition from &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;=&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NULL&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=HowTo:Filter_On_Null_Records&amp;diff=1272</id>
		<title>HowTo:Filter On Null Records</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=HowTo:Filter_On_Null_Records&amp;diff=1272"/>
		<updated>2025-04-07T20:04:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When filtering on a screen, the &amp;quot;=&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;IS NULL&amp;quot; fields are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;=&amp;quot; is used when the field is a text input field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;IS NULL&amp;quot; is used when the field is a related record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right-click the field you want to filter on and select Filter By. The Filter Screen appears. Change the Condition from &#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NULL&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=HowTo:Filter_On_Null_Records&amp;diff=1271</id>
		<title>HowTo:Filter On Null Records</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=HowTo:Filter_On_Null_Records&amp;diff=1271"/>
		<updated>2025-04-07T19:59:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: Created page with &amp;quot;How to filter on null records.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to filter on null records.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Pirouette&amp;diff=1259</id>
		<title>Manual:Pirouette</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Pirouette&amp;diff=1259"/>
		<updated>2024-07-31T17:13:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Preset Detail */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Subsystems]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Pirouette==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pivot Table===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location: Applications / Pirouette&#039;&#039;&#039; (used for analyzing data)&lt;br /&gt;
:* Pivot Table / Tables Tab - displays the pivot tables created for analzying data&lt;br /&gt;
:* Pivot Table / Fields Tab - displays the list of fields available to build the pivot table&lt;br /&gt;
:* Definition Tab - pivot table definitions are created here&lt;br /&gt;
:* Rebuild Button - dispays the data selected for analysis&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:PT_Payroll_Deductions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preset Detail==&lt;br /&gt;
The creator of a Pivot Table becomes the Owner of that Pivot Table. To add users to a Pivot Table view, select the Pivot table from the left pane, click the edit icon to the right of the Pivot Table name at the top, then select Preset Detail. Add the user(s) to the Favorite Users list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Favorite Users will be able to add or remove fields in the view as needed and save a new preset if desired. A user must be an Owner of the Preset to save any changes to a Preset Pivot Table.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Pirouette&amp;diff=1258</id>
		<title>Manual:Pirouette</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Pirouette&amp;diff=1258"/>
		<updated>2024-07-31T14:43:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Preset Detail */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Subsystems]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Pirouette==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pivot Table===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location: Applications / Pirouette&#039;&#039;&#039; (used for analyzing data)&lt;br /&gt;
:* Pivot Table / Tables Tab - displays the pivot tables created for analzying data&lt;br /&gt;
:* Pivot Table / Fields Tab - displays the list of fields available to build the pivot table&lt;br /&gt;
:* Definition Tab - pivot table definitions are created here&lt;br /&gt;
:* Rebuild Button - dispays the data selected for analysis&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:PT_Payroll_Deductions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preset Detail==&lt;br /&gt;
The creator of a Pivot Table becomes the Owner of that Pivot Table. To add users to a Pivot Table view, select the Pivot table from the left pane, click the edit icon to the right of the Pivot Table name at the top, then select Preset Detail. Add the user(s) to the Favorite Users list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Favorite Users will be able to add or remove fields as needed and save a new preset if desired. A user must be an Owner of the Preset to save any changes to a Preset Pivot Table.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Pirouette&amp;diff=1257</id>
		<title>Manual:Pirouette</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Pirouette&amp;diff=1257"/>
		<updated>2024-07-31T14:42:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Preset Detail */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Subsystems]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Pirouette==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pivot Table===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location: Applications / Pirouette&#039;&#039;&#039; (used for analyzing data)&lt;br /&gt;
:* Pivot Table / Tables Tab - displays the pivot tables created for analzying data&lt;br /&gt;
:* Pivot Table / Fields Tab - displays the list of fields available to build the pivot table&lt;br /&gt;
:* Definition Tab - pivot table definitions are created here&lt;br /&gt;
:* Rebuild Button - dispays the data selected for analysis&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:PT_Payroll_Deductions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preset Detail==&lt;br /&gt;
The creator of a Pivot Table becomes the Owner of that Pivot Table. To add users to a Pivot Table view, select the Pivot table from the left pane, click the edit icon to the right of the Pivot Table name at the top, then select Preset Detail. Add the user(s) to the Favorite Users list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Favorite Users will be able to add or remove fields as needed and save a new preset if desired. A user must be an Owner of the Preset to save changes under the same Pivot Table name.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Pirouette&amp;diff=1256</id>
		<title>Manual:Pirouette</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Pirouette&amp;diff=1256"/>
		<updated>2024-07-31T14:42:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Pirouette */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Subsystems]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Pirouette==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pivot Table===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location: Applications / Pirouette&#039;&#039;&#039; (used for analyzing data)&lt;br /&gt;
:* Pivot Table / Tables Tab - displays the pivot tables created for analzying data&lt;br /&gt;
:* Pivot Table / Fields Tab - displays the list of fields available to build the pivot table&lt;br /&gt;
:* Definition Tab - pivot table definitions are created here&lt;br /&gt;
:* Rebuild Button - dispays the data selected for analysis&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:PT_Payroll_Deductions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preset Detail==&lt;br /&gt;
The creator of a Pivot Table becomes the Owner of that Pivot Table. To add user to a Pivot Table view, select the Pivot table from the left pane, click the edit icon to the right of the Pivot Table name at the top, then select Preset Detail. Add the user(s) to the Favorite Users list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Favorite Users will be able to add or remove fields as needed and save a new preset if desired. A user must be an Owner of the Preset to save changes under the same Pivot Table name.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1255</id>
		<title>Manual:Basics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1255"/>
		<updated>2024-04-30T19:26:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* File:FilterPresets.png Filter Presets */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen ==&lt;br /&gt;
Flex Screens are the standard Epiphany data entry screens.  They all have the same layout and same features to make your user experience more consistent.  In addition to the data displayed on the screen, there are several design layouts listed below that are common to all Flex Screens.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Title Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The title bar is across the top of the window, and displays the name of the screen you are on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The menu bar is directly below the title bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: The First option is always Applications; provides access to standard screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Menus will differ:&lt;br /&gt;
:*On how Epiphany was configured for your organization,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Individual user rights, and on&lt;br /&gt;
:*What application or menu item you’re in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shortcut Keys – Main Application (differs by Menu, but same concept). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A = Applications (continue to hold Alt and Press A again...)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x2) = AR&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x3) = AP&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+T = Tables&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+I = Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+G = General Ledger&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+P = Payroll&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+U = Utilities&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+S = Setup&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+R = Reports&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+H = Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:For Submenus – Use first letter of Menu Item; if multiples of same beginning letter, press that letter multiple times to move through the menu items beginning with that letter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
: The toolbar is directly below the menu bar, and contains action icons.  Hovering over those icons will display a short description of the function. Icons appear white when available and grayed out when not available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#far:arrow-circle-left}} Back&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Goes back to previous screen&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:chevron-circle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-right}} {{#fas:chevron-circle-right}} Navigation Buttons&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: The outer arrows in a circle move to the first and last records of a table, the white inner arrows advance forward or backward one record&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddDeleteEdit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:fa-plus}} Add&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Immediately adds a new record; complete fields otherwise there will be a blank record in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit; this will remove the newly added record if it has not been saved yet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be removed or merged with an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Yes to delete currently displayed record and merge with an existing record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click No to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MergeDeletedRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record and selecting the record to merge with, confirm deletion and merge, then click Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMergeDeleteRecordsDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: (Clicking No from this screen only deletes the record and does not merge the record with another record)&lt;br /&gt;
: Click no to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Cancel to cancel the deletion&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit and allows any changes to be canceled if the changes have not been saved already.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RefreshSearch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Refresh&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the record to be refreshed to see the most current view of the screen you are currently on.  Generally used when someone is editing the record you are currently viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for lookup of records&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Print.png]] Print&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Print is active on screens that have a standard report defined.  The standard print dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Print Preview&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Found to the right of the Print button; prints the report to screen first for review prior to printing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ActiveRecords.png]] Active Records&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: By default shows only active records...  This is a toggle button and can toggle to show all records or only Active Records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Filter.png]] Filter&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the records to be filtered by any standard field on the current screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Starting with the first field you want to filter on, right-click the data field and select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filter By&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; from the menu. The field will automatically populate the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; grid of the Filter Flex Grid. &lt;br /&gt;
#To select a different &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search Value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button on the right of the object line. Start typing the data you want to filter (keystroke match) and then double-click the selection from the list, and it will repopulate the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search Value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; field. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Submit Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button at the bottom. You are taken back to the screen and the records are now filtered. The status bar at bottom of screen indicates &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FILTERED SCREEN&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#To expand on that filter and add another field to the filter, simply repeat the above steps. &lt;br /&gt;
#To clear the filter, click the Filter icon from the Toolbar, then click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close and Clear Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to filter based on an &amp;quot;OR&amp;quot; statement, after selecting all the fields using the above steps, in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Condition String&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; below the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, replace &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;AND&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where needed with &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Filter Presets&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
To the right of the Filter icon allows the use of saved Filters or removes the current filter to display all records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To save a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filter Preset&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, once you have created your filter, from the Filter Flex Grid showing all &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, at the top left in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Presets&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; field enter a name for your preset, then click the green + icon to add/save your preset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Preset will appear in the dropdown to the right of the Filter icon on the Toolbar. Saved presets are specific to each user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:CaptureImage.png]] Capture Image&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for document scanning with an attached compatible scanner/capture device.  Document is scanned, added to the Documents Table and a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document scanned.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:AttachFile.png]] Attach File&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for a file to be selected from a location on your computer (network drive, local drive, etc.) and attached to the current record.  Again, the document is added to the Documents Table, a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document/file attached.  Note:  this creates a copy of the file and does not remove the file from its original location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OtherActions.png]] Other Actions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;==== &lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to several other actions available if definitions have been created.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Review Duplicate Records&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Record&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Export Data:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Exports data to a file.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Copy Record:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Allows for copying of a record to create a new record to save data entry time if new record is very similar to an existing record. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Mail Merge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Change All Filtered Records:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; From within a filtered screen, this allows the ability to update a specific field containing same data to all of the filtered records. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Open Shortcut&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Record Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific record.&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Screen Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Notifications.png]] Notifications&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: When green, there are unviewed notifications for the user logged in (not specific to the current record on the screen).  Notifications are generated by Document Flow Rules created in the system to notify users when a record has been added, changed, or a note added to a record related to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Object Screen.png]] Object Screen&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: shows each screen related to the object (screen) a user is currently viewing.  This allows a user to quickly switch between related screens and only if user has access to the screen(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchPin.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Search.png]] Global Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows a user to do a global search. The Search Results returned indicate which tables the string of data appears.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Pin.png]] Pin&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a user to pin a screen without opening another instance of Epiphany. The pinned screen will stay open as you open/navigate to other screens. It will stay open until either the pinned screen is closed or the user exits Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Relationships Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to other records related to the current record on the screen.  Item will be bold white when there are related items and grayed out when there are no related objects attached.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RelationshipsBar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:;Relationships&lt;br /&gt;
:: shows all records related to the current record displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Notes&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the capability to attach notes as well as view existing notes related to a record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Documents&lt;br /&gt;
::allows the capability to view all documents related to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Approvals&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows for reviewing and/or signing electronic documents.  Used anytime an electronic signature needs to be captured.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Tasks&lt;br /&gt;
:: displays any active Tasks related to the selected record.&lt;br /&gt;
:;History&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the user to view the history of changes made to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
::; Database Change History Grid&lt;br /&gt;
::: displays the date/time stamp along with the user that performed any adds, changes and/or deletes to the records being viewed, the new value and the relationship type along with the Screen the action was performed from.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Help&lt;br /&gt;
::provides a brief description of the screen, details and technical data of a specific field. The current screen name is displayed under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; section. Hovering over a field will display help information under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Detail&#039;&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Information Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Contains information about your Epiphany session and the record currently displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:InformationBar.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:; Current User (1)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the user currently logged into Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Shortcuts (2)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Toggles shortcuts (on and off) to commonly used screens.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Server or Computer Name (3)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the server or the computer currently being used to access Epiphany&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record ID (4)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the internal unique ID of the record currently displayed&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record Count (5)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the number of records in the current Filter or Table of records&lt;br /&gt;
:; Unfiltered (6)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays number of filtered records when a filter is in place (when filtered this will toggle to &#039;&#039;&#039;FILTERED SCREEN&#039;&#039;&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
:; No Reason (7)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows for entering a reason changes are being made to a record and records the reason within its history records. Generally, no longer used as Notes are now used.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Notification (8)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays current notifications in system for current user to take action on.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Widgets (9)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays Widget control to create shortcuts to screens and widgets.&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Shortcuts to screens are easily created&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Be on the screen you want to create a shortcut to&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Go into Widget mode&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click [[File:AddShortcut.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click Yes&lt;br /&gt;
:; Theme (10)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows user to change the color scheme and landing screen.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Zoom (11)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows the user to change the zoom percentage of Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Database Name (12)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the database you are currently accessing.  If you have access to more than one Epiphany database, you can double-click this field to switch to another database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen Lookup ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Tool Bar [[File:LookupToolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Text field - standard search&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Filter.png]] = filter on selected search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Select Record -- opens record selected/highlighted&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:ActiveRecords.png]] = active records (toggle to show both Active &amp;amp; Inactive records)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AdvancedSearch.png]] = E-MC2 allows for advanced search (search on any portion of selected field)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:RecordID.png]] = displays unique Record ID&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:SearchByCategory.png]] = search by category then by record by expanding category&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Refresh.png]] = refreshes records displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Clear.png]]  = closes Flex Screen Lookup without selecting record&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Favorites.png]] = displays records you have added to your Favorites list 	&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AddNewRecord.png]] = allows user to add the text in search field box as a new record in the database (must have rights to “add on fly”)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Ascending.png]] and [[File:Descending.png]] = toggles sort order between Ascending/Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Normal behavior&lt;br /&gt;
::* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
::** Default order of columns displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expanding [[File:Expand.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
::** Select Column to sort on&lt;br /&gt;
::** Ascending&lt;br /&gt;
::** Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Additional behavior&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickColumnHeader.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Column Header in a grid (vs. Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left-click Column Header Name to sort&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::::* Ascending/descending Toggle [[File:Ascending.png]] or [[File:Descending.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Scroll Set / Clear &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left to right scrolling of columns&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::*  Clears on close&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickRecord.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Record in a grid (vs. Column Header) &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Copy / Paste&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Moves records in a grid (sets priority only for categorized items)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites (Add/remove) – adds record to Favorites list and displays on default Lookup screen (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Colors – color code records in a grid (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickTableProperties.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click Table Properties [[File:Expand2.png]] or [[File:Expand.png]]   &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show… (temporary; doesn’t save in layout) &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* IDs&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Relationship Types&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Priorities&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites Mode – displays only records added as a Favorite (*)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Row Lines – will show horizontal grid lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Column Lines – will show vertical grid lines (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout (column order &amp;amp; width; per user; does not change default lookup field)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout Filters&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Default Layout – reset to default layout&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Export to File&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Graph&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Navigating and Understanding&lt;br /&gt;
::* Links two records together&lt;br /&gt;
::* Fields with lookups (FlexScreen Lookup) create links to related record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hover mouse to see number of related records [[File:RelatedRecordsHover.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::** The first number is the record currently displayed in the field and the second number is the total number of related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::** To add or remove relationships you must be in Edit mode.[[File:AddRemove.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::*** + allows for adding additional related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::*** - = removes relationship of displayed related record&lt;br /&gt;
::** Double-clicking a related record moves user to that record information&lt;br /&gt;
::** Note:  IMPORTANT to never type over information; you will delete information or change that record in the database (there is no Undo)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Screens ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - displays the Epiphany application with your Company Logo.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Screens:Person|Person]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all companies in your database&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::* Main – company demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::* Addresses – displays all addresses for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Dealer/Distributor – displays dealers and distributors related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AR History – displays accounts receivable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP History – displays accounts payable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Inv History – displays invoice history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Open Orders – displays open orders for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Opportunities – displays status of sales opportunities for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contracts – displays all contracts related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Authorizations – displays authorizations for licensing/subscriptions or other items to track for billing back to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Tasks – displays any tasks in the system related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Activity – displays all contact activity received for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Customer Assets – tracks assets sold to customer&lt;br /&gt;
::* Acct Defaults – displays default billing information and expense account for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Credit Card -- stores credit card information for billing&lt;br /&gt;
::* Affiliations – tracks parent companies and subsidiary companies&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Top Section(Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Order (Inventory Orders) – shortcut to create a new order (auto-fills Ordered By and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create PO (Customer Purchase Orders) – shortcut to create a new purchase order (auto-fills Order From and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sort Name vs. Company Name – Sort Name auto-fills when Company Name field is entered; can be edited to sort differently for searching records&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – link pertinent categories to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Vend# – displays vendor number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cust# – displays customer number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* EIN – displays Employee Identification Number or Federal Tax ID number to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Company Information (Main Tab) – displays address related to company record &lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Contacts (Main Tab) – displays contacts related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
:5.	Logo (Main Tab) – import company’s logo&lt;br /&gt;
:6.	Bottom Section (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Internal contacts managing, services, etc. the related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Num Employees – for recording employee size of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Annual Revenue – for recording annual revenue of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:7. Comment (Main Tab) – displays any comments pertinent to related company record that would not be entered as a note&lt;br /&gt;
:8. Acct Password – displays password associated with related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:9. Print Label (Main Tab) – print an address label to compatible printer&lt;br /&gt;
:10. Filtered (Main Tab) – prints address labels for all records when company records are filtered&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Notes (Main Tab) – add public or private notes and comments to related record&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Addresses Expanded Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all the addresses in the system&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Top Section&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 1 – first line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 2 – second line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* City, ST ZIP – City, State (abbreviated), and Zip code (allows for +4 and foreign)&lt;br /&gt;
::* County – County city is located&lt;br /&gt;
::* Country – default is USA&lt;br /&gt;
::* Map – provide a URL to a map if desired&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Desc – description of address if needed (i.e. Warehouse vs. Office)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Latitude – when an address does not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Longitude – used when an address not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Phone Number &amp;amp; Phone Desc – displays phone for that address (used when multiple addresses are used that have different phone numbers for each location)&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP Location – used for accounts payable invoices/purchase orders&lt;br /&gt;
::* Do not subscribe – opt-out of receiving certain information&lt;br /&gt;
::* Special Info – special notes specific to this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Add Task Button – creates a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Contract Button – creates a new contract&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task History – displays the task history&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Company – displays company for this specific address record (i.e. rental or leased property)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Person – displays contact at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Company – displays company that owns property at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Person – displays contact name of owning company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Tax Key – displays sales tax key to use for this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contract – displays any contracts related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Zone Information – displays zone information related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Notes – add public or private notes and comments to related address&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tasks Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all tasks in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Task View&lt;br /&gt;
::* Active – displays Active tasks only&lt;br /&gt;
::* Completed – displays completed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cancelled – displays cancelled tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Projects – displays all project tasks in system&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hide Tasks with Uncompleted Prerequisites&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Future Tasks – displays tasks with due date in the future&lt;br /&gt;
::* Go To Task# - enter specific task number into text box to open and display a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Print – prints tasks displayed on screen in a report format&lt;br /&gt;
::* Graph – visual graphic of new tasks vs. closed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filtered – displays graph based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Assigned To – displays tasks assigned to criteria selected below&lt;br /&gt;
::* Requested By – displays tasks by person requesting task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Coordinator – displays tasks by Task Coordinator&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Filter – displays data for a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – displays tasks by related category&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Type – displays tasks by related task type&lt;br /&gt;
::* Person – displays tasks by specific person&lt;br /&gt;
::* Department – displays tasks by department&lt;br /&gt;
::* Company – displays tasks by specific company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Mine – displays tasks for user currently logged in&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show All – shows all tasks for your company&lt;br /&gt;
::* New Task – allows for entry of a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting – click on column header(s) to sort in ascending or descending order&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expand [[File:Expand.png]] – show more records/data&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	Activity View – displays all recorded activity for your organization and allows for easy creation of new activity records&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Appointment View – displays appointments scheduled&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date range –display by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Worklog View – displays logged hours based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date Range – displays by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Project View – displays project timelines&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Mileage Log – displays mileage&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1254</id>
		<title>Manual:Basics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1254"/>
		<updated>2024-04-30T19:22:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* File:FilterPresets.png Filter Presets */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen ==&lt;br /&gt;
Flex Screens are the standard Epiphany data entry screens.  They all have the same layout and same features to make your user experience more consistent.  In addition to the data displayed on the screen, there are several design layouts listed below that are common to all Flex Screens.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Title Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The title bar is across the top of the window, and displays the name of the screen you are on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The menu bar is directly below the title bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: The First option is always Applications; provides access to standard screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Menus will differ:&lt;br /&gt;
:*On how Epiphany was configured for your organization,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Individual user rights, and on&lt;br /&gt;
:*What application or menu item you’re in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shortcut Keys – Main Application (differs by Menu, but same concept). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A = Applications (continue to hold Alt and Press A again...)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x2) = AR&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x3) = AP&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+T = Tables&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+I = Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+G = General Ledger&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+P = Payroll&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+U = Utilities&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+S = Setup&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+R = Reports&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+H = Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:For Submenus – Use first letter of Menu Item; if multiples of same beginning letter, press that letter multiple times to move through the menu items beginning with that letter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
: The toolbar is directly below the menu bar, and contains action icons.  Hovering over those icons will display a short description of the function. Icons appear white when available and grayed out when not available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#far:arrow-circle-left}} Back&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Goes back to previous screen&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:chevron-circle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-right}} {{#fas:chevron-circle-right}} Navigation Buttons&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: The outer arrows in a circle move to the first and last records of a table, the white inner arrows advance forward or backward one record&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddDeleteEdit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:fa-plus}} Add&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Immediately adds a new record; complete fields otherwise there will be a blank record in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit; this will remove the newly added record if it has not been saved yet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be removed or merged with an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Yes to delete currently displayed record and merge with an existing record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click No to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MergeDeletedRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record and selecting the record to merge with, confirm deletion and merge, then click Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMergeDeleteRecordsDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: (Clicking No from this screen only deletes the record and does not merge the record with another record)&lt;br /&gt;
: Click no to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Cancel to cancel the deletion&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit and allows any changes to be canceled if the changes have not been saved already.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RefreshSearch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Refresh&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the record to be refreshed to see the most current view of the screen you are currently on.  Generally used when someone is editing the record you are currently viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for lookup of records&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Print.png]] Print&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Print is active on screens that have a standard report defined.  The standard print dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Print Preview&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Found to the right of the Print button; prints the report to screen first for review prior to printing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ActiveRecords.png]] Active Records&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: By default shows only active records...  This is a toggle button and can toggle to show all records or only Active Records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Filter.png]] Filter&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the records to be filtered by any standard field on the current screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Starting with the first field you want to filter on, right-click the data field and select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filter By&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; from the menu. The field will automatically populate the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; grid of the Filter Flex Grid. &lt;br /&gt;
#To select a different &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search Value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button on the right of the object line. Start typing the data you want to filter (keystroke match) and then double-click the selection from the list, and it will repopulate the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search Value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; field. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Submit Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button at the bottom. You are taken back to the screen and the records are now filtered. The status bar at bottom of screen indicates &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FILTERED SCREEN&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#To expand on that filter and add another field to the filter, simply repeat the above steps. &lt;br /&gt;
#To clear the filter, click the Filter icon from the Toolbar, then click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close and Clear Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to filter based on an &amp;quot;OR&amp;quot; statement, after selecting all the fields using the above steps, in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Condition String&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; below the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, replace &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;AND&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where needed with &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Filter Presets&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
To the right of the Filter icon allows the use of saved Filters or removes the current filter to display all records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To save a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filter Preset&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, once you have created your filter, from the Filter Flex Grid showing all &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, at the top left in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Presets&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; field enter a name for your &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Preset&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, then click the green + icon to add/save your &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Preset&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Preset will appear in the dropdown to the right of the Filter icon on the Toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:CaptureImage.png]] Capture Image&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for document scanning with an attached compatible scanner/capture device.  Document is scanned, added to the Documents Table and a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document scanned.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:AttachFile.png]] Attach File&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for a file to be selected from a location on your computer (network drive, local drive, etc.) and attached to the current record.  Again, the document is added to the Documents Table, a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document/file attached.  Note:  this creates a copy of the file and does not remove the file from its original location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OtherActions.png]] Other Actions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;==== &lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to several other actions available if definitions have been created.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Review Duplicate Records&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Record&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Export Data:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Exports data to a file.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Copy Record:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Allows for copying of a record to create a new record to save data entry time if new record is very similar to an existing record. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Mail Merge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Change All Filtered Records:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; From within a filtered screen, this allows the ability to update a specific field containing same data to all of the filtered records. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Open Shortcut&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Record Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific record.&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Screen Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Notifications.png]] Notifications&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: When green, there are unviewed notifications for the user logged in (not specific to the current record on the screen).  Notifications are generated by Document Flow Rules created in the system to notify users when a record has been added, changed, or a note added to a record related to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Object Screen.png]] Object Screen&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: shows each screen related to the object (screen) a user is currently viewing.  This allows a user to quickly switch between related screens and only if user has access to the screen(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchPin.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Search.png]] Global Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows a user to do a global search. The Search Results returned indicate which tables the string of data appears.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Pin.png]] Pin&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a user to pin a screen without opening another instance of Epiphany. The pinned screen will stay open as you open/navigate to other screens. It will stay open until either the pinned screen is closed or the user exits Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Relationships Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to other records related to the current record on the screen.  Item will be bold white when there are related items and grayed out when there are no related objects attached.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RelationshipsBar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:;Relationships&lt;br /&gt;
:: shows all records related to the current record displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Notes&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the capability to attach notes as well as view existing notes related to a record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Documents&lt;br /&gt;
::allows the capability to view all documents related to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Approvals&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows for reviewing and/or signing electronic documents.  Used anytime an electronic signature needs to be captured.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Tasks&lt;br /&gt;
:: displays any active Tasks related to the selected record.&lt;br /&gt;
:;History&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the user to view the history of changes made to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
::; Database Change History Grid&lt;br /&gt;
::: displays the date/time stamp along with the user that performed any adds, changes and/or deletes to the records being viewed, the new value and the relationship type along with the Screen the action was performed from.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Help&lt;br /&gt;
::provides a brief description of the screen, details and technical data of a specific field. The current screen name is displayed under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; section. Hovering over a field will display help information under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Detail&#039;&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Information Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Contains information about your Epiphany session and the record currently displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:InformationBar.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:; Current User (1)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the user currently logged into Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Shortcuts (2)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Toggles shortcuts (on and off) to commonly used screens.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Server or Computer Name (3)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the server or the computer currently being used to access Epiphany&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record ID (4)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the internal unique ID of the record currently displayed&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record Count (5)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the number of records in the current Filter or Table of records&lt;br /&gt;
:; Unfiltered (6)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays number of filtered records when a filter is in place (when filtered this will toggle to &#039;&#039;&#039;FILTERED SCREEN&#039;&#039;&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
:; No Reason (7)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows for entering a reason changes are being made to a record and records the reason within its history records. Generally, no longer used as Notes are now used.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Notification (8)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays current notifications in system for current user to take action on.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Widgets (9)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays Widget control to create shortcuts to screens and widgets.&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Shortcuts to screens are easily created&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Be on the screen you want to create a shortcut to&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Go into Widget mode&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click [[File:AddShortcut.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click Yes&lt;br /&gt;
:; Theme (10)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows user to change the color scheme and landing screen.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Zoom (11)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows the user to change the zoom percentage of Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Database Name (12)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the database you are currently accessing.  If you have access to more than one Epiphany database, you can double-click this field to switch to another database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen Lookup ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Tool Bar [[File:LookupToolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Text field - standard search&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Filter.png]] = filter on selected search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Select Record -- opens record selected/highlighted&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:ActiveRecords.png]] = active records (toggle to show both Active &amp;amp; Inactive records)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AdvancedSearch.png]] = E-MC2 allows for advanced search (search on any portion of selected field)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:RecordID.png]] = displays unique Record ID&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:SearchByCategory.png]] = search by category then by record by expanding category&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Refresh.png]] = refreshes records displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Clear.png]]  = closes Flex Screen Lookup without selecting record&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Favorites.png]] = displays records you have added to your Favorites list 	&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AddNewRecord.png]] = allows user to add the text in search field box as a new record in the database (must have rights to “add on fly”)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Ascending.png]] and [[File:Descending.png]] = toggles sort order between Ascending/Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Normal behavior&lt;br /&gt;
::* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
::** Default order of columns displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expanding [[File:Expand.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
::** Select Column to sort on&lt;br /&gt;
::** Ascending&lt;br /&gt;
::** Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Additional behavior&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickColumnHeader.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Column Header in a grid (vs. Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left-click Column Header Name to sort&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::::* Ascending/descending Toggle [[File:Ascending.png]] or [[File:Descending.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Scroll Set / Clear &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left to right scrolling of columns&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::*  Clears on close&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickRecord.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Record in a grid (vs. Column Header) &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Copy / Paste&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Moves records in a grid (sets priority only for categorized items)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites (Add/remove) – adds record to Favorites list and displays on default Lookup screen (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Colors – color code records in a grid (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickTableProperties.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click Table Properties [[File:Expand2.png]] or [[File:Expand.png]]   &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show… (temporary; doesn’t save in layout) &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* IDs&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Relationship Types&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Priorities&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites Mode – displays only records added as a Favorite (*)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Row Lines – will show horizontal grid lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Column Lines – will show vertical grid lines (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout (column order &amp;amp; width; per user; does not change default lookup field)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout Filters&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Default Layout – reset to default layout&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Export to File&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Graph&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Navigating and Understanding&lt;br /&gt;
::* Links two records together&lt;br /&gt;
::* Fields with lookups (FlexScreen Lookup) create links to related record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hover mouse to see number of related records [[File:RelatedRecordsHover.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::** The first number is the record currently displayed in the field and the second number is the total number of related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::** To add or remove relationships you must be in Edit mode.[[File:AddRemove.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::*** + allows for adding additional related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::*** - = removes relationship of displayed related record&lt;br /&gt;
::** Double-clicking a related record moves user to that record information&lt;br /&gt;
::** Note:  IMPORTANT to never type over information; you will delete information or change that record in the database (there is no Undo)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Screens ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - displays the Epiphany application with your Company Logo.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Screens:Person|Person]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all companies in your database&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::* Main – company demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::* Addresses – displays all addresses for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Dealer/Distributor – displays dealers and distributors related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AR History – displays accounts receivable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP History – displays accounts payable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Inv History – displays invoice history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Open Orders – displays open orders for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Opportunities – displays status of sales opportunities for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contracts – displays all contracts related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Authorizations – displays authorizations for licensing/subscriptions or other items to track for billing back to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Tasks – displays any tasks in the system related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Activity – displays all contact activity received for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Customer Assets – tracks assets sold to customer&lt;br /&gt;
::* Acct Defaults – displays default billing information and expense account for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Credit Card -- stores credit card information for billing&lt;br /&gt;
::* Affiliations – tracks parent companies and subsidiary companies&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Top Section(Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Order (Inventory Orders) – shortcut to create a new order (auto-fills Ordered By and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create PO (Customer Purchase Orders) – shortcut to create a new purchase order (auto-fills Order From and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sort Name vs. Company Name – Sort Name auto-fills when Company Name field is entered; can be edited to sort differently for searching records&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – link pertinent categories to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Vend# – displays vendor number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cust# – displays customer number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* EIN – displays Employee Identification Number or Federal Tax ID number to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Company Information (Main Tab) – displays address related to company record &lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Contacts (Main Tab) – displays contacts related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
:5.	Logo (Main Tab) – import company’s logo&lt;br /&gt;
:6.	Bottom Section (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Internal contacts managing, services, etc. the related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Num Employees – for recording employee size of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Annual Revenue – for recording annual revenue of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:7. Comment (Main Tab) – displays any comments pertinent to related company record that would not be entered as a note&lt;br /&gt;
:8. Acct Password – displays password associated with related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:9. Print Label (Main Tab) – print an address label to compatible printer&lt;br /&gt;
:10. Filtered (Main Tab) – prints address labels for all records when company records are filtered&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Notes (Main Tab) – add public or private notes and comments to related record&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Addresses Expanded Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all the addresses in the system&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Top Section&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 1 – first line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 2 – second line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* City, ST ZIP – City, State (abbreviated), and Zip code (allows for +4 and foreign)&lt;br /&gt;
::* County – County city is located&lt;br /&gt;
::* Country – default is USA&lt;br /&gt;
::* Map – provide a URL to a map if desired&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Desc – description of address if needed (i.e. Warehouse vs. Office)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Latitude – when an address does not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Longitude – used when an address not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Phone Number &amp;amp; Phone Desc – displays phone for that address (used when multiple addresses are used that have different phone numbers for each location)&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP Location – used for accounts payable invoices/purchase orders&lt;br /&gt;
::* Do not subscribe – opt-out of receiving certain information&lt;br /&gt;
::* Special Info – special notes specific to this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Add Task Button – creates a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Contract Button – creates a new contract&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task History – displays the task history&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Company – displays company for this specific address record (i.e. rental or leased property)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Person – displays contact at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Company – displays company that owns property at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Person – displays contact name of owning company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Tax Key – displays sales tax key to use for this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contract – displays any contracts related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Zone Information – displays zone information related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Notes – add public or private notes and comments to related address&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tasks Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all tasks in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Task View&lt;br /&gt;
::* Active – displays Active tasks only&lt;br /&gt;
::* Completed – displays completed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cancelled – displays cancelled tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Projects – displays all project tasks in system&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hide Tasks with Uncompleted Prerequisites&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Future Tasks – displays tasks with due date in the future&lt;br /&gt;
::* Go To Task# - enter specific task number into text box to open and display a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Print – prints tasks displayed on screen in a report format&lt;br /&gt;
::* Graph – visual graphic of new tasks vs. closed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filtered – displays graph based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Assigned To – displays tasks assigned to criteria selected below&lt;br /&gt;
::* Requested By – displays tasks by person requesting task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Coordinator – displays tasks by Task Coordinator&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Filter – displays data for a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – displays tasks by related category&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Type – displays tasks by related task type&lt;br /&gt;
::* Person – displays tasks by specific person&lt;br /&gt;
::* Department – displays tasks by department&lt;br /&gt;
::* Company – displays tasks by specific company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Mine – displays tasks for user currently logged in&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show All – shows all tasks for your company&lt;br /&gt;
::* New Task – allows for entry of a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting – click on column header(s) to sort in ascending or descending order&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expand [[File:Expand.png]] – show more records/data&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	Activity View – displays all recorded activity for your organization and allows for easy creation of new activity records&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Appointment View – displays appointments scheduled&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date range –display by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Worklog View – displays logged hours based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date Range – displays by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Project View – displays project timelines&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Mileage Log – displays mileage&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1253</id>
		<title>Manual:Basics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1253"/>
		<updated>2024-04-30T19:22:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* File:Filter.png Filter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen ==&lt;br /&gt;
Flex Screens are the standard Epiphany data entry screens.  They all have the same layout and same features to make your user experience more consistent.  In addition to the data displayed on the screen, there are several design layouts listed below that are common to all Flex Screens.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Title Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The title bar is across the top of the window, and displays the name of the screen you are on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The menu bar is directly below the title bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: The First option is always Applications; provides access to standard screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Menus will differ:&lt;br /&gt;
:*On how Epiphany was configured for your organization,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Individual user rights, and on&lt;br /&gt;
:*What application or menu item you’re in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shortcut Keys – Main Application (differs by Menu, but same concept). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A = Applications (continue to hold Alt and Press A again...)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x2) = AR&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x3) = AP&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+T = Tables&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+I = Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+G = General Ledger&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+P = Payroll&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+U = Utilities&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+S = Setup&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+R = Reports&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+H = Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:For Submenus – Use first letter of Menu Item; if multiples of same beginning letter, press that letter multiple times to move through the menu items beginning with that letter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
: The toolbar is directly below the menu bar, and contains action icons.  Hovering over those icons will display a short description of the function. Icons appear white when available and grayed out when not available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#far:arrow-circle-left}} Back&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Goes back to previous screen&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:chevron-circle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-right}} {{#fas:chevron-circle-right}} Navigation Buttons&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: The outer arrows in a circle move to the first and last records of a table, the white inner arrows advance forward or backward one record&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddDeleteEdit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:fa-plus}} Add&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Immediately adds a new record; complete fields otherwise there will be a blank record in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit; this will remove the newly added record if it has not been saved yet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be removed or merged with an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Yes to delete currently displayed record and merge with an existing record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click No to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MergeDeletedRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record and selecting the record to merge with, confirm deletion and merge, then click Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMergeDeleteRecordsDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: (Clicking No from this screen only deletes the record and does not merge the record with another record)&lt;br /&gt;
: Click no to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Cancel to cancel the deletion&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit and allows any changes to be canceled if the changes have not been saved already.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RefreshSearch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Refresh&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the record to be refreshed to see the most current view of the screen you are currently on.  Generally used when someone is editing the record you are currently viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for lookup of records&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Print.png]] Print&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Print is active on screens that have a standard report defined.  The standard print dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Print Preview&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Found to the right of the Print button; prints the report to screen first for review prior to printing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ActiveRecords.png]] Active Records&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: By default shows only active records...  This is a toggle button and can toggle to show all records or only Active Records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Filter.png]] Filter&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the records to be filtered by any standard field on the current screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Starting with the first field you want to filter on, right-click the data field and select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filter By&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; from the menu. The field will automatically populate the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; grid of the Filter Flex Grid. &lt;br /&gt;
#To select a different &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search Value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button on the right of the object line. Start typing the data you want to filter (keystroke match) and then double-click the selection from the list, and it will repopulate the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search Value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; field. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Submit Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button at the bottom. You are taken back to the screen and the records are now filtered. The status bar at bottom of screen indicates &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FILTERED SCREEN&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#To expand on that filter and add another field to the filter, simply repeat the above steps. &lt;br /&gt;
#To clear the filter, click the Filter icon from the Toolbar, then click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close and Clear Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to filter based on an &amp;quot;OR&amp;quot; statement, after selecting all the fields using the above steps, in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Condition String&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; below the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, replace &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;AND&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where needed with &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Filter Presets&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: To the right of the Filter icon allows the use of saved Filters or removes the current filter to display all records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To save a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filter Preset&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, once you have created your filter, from the Filter Flex Grid showing all &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, at the top left in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Presets&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; field enter a name for your &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Preset&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, then click the green + icon to add/save your &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Preset&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Preset will appear in the dropdown to the right of the Filter icon on the Toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:CaptureImage.png]] Capture Image&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for document scanning with an attached compatible scanner/capture device.  Document is scanned, added to the Documents Table and a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document scanned.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:AttachFile.png]] Attach File&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for a file to be selected from a location on your computer (network drive, local drive, etc.) and attached to the current record.  Again, the document is added to the Documents Table, a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document/file attached.  Note:  this creates a copy of the file and does not remove the file from its original location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OtherActions.png]] Other Actions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;==== &lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to several other actions available if definitions have been created.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Review Duplicate Records&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Record&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Export Data:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Exports data to a file.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Copy Record:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Allows for copying of a record to create a new record to save data entry time if new record is very similar to an existing record. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Mail Merge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Change All Filtered Records:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; From within a filtered screen, this allows the ability to update a specific field containing same data to all of the filtered records. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Open Shortcut&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Record Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific record.&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Screen Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Notifications.png]] Notifications&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: When green, there are unviewed notifications for the user logged in (not specific to the current record on the screen).  Notifications are generated by Document Flow Rules created in the system to notify users when a record has been added, changed, or a note added to a record related to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Object Screen.png]] Object Screen&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: shows each screen related to the object (screen) a user is currently viewing.  This allows a user to quickly switch between related screens and only if user has access to the screen(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchPin.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Search.png]] Global Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows a user to do a global search. The Search Results returned indicate which tables the string of data appears.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Pin.png]] Pin&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a user to pin a screen without opening another instance of Epiphany. The pinned screen will stay open as you open/navigate to other screens. It will stay open until either the pinned screen is closed or the user exits Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Relationships Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to other records related to the current record on the screen.  Item will be bold white when there are related items and grayed out when there are no related objects attached.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RelationshipsBar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:;Relationships&lt;br /&gt;
:: shows all records related to the current record displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Notes&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the capability to attach notes as well as view existing notes related to a record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Documents&lt;br /&gt;
::allows the capability to view all documents related to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Approvals&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows for reviewing and/or signing electronic documents.  Used anytime an electronic signature needs to be captured.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Tasks&lt;br /&gt;
:: displays any active Tasks related to the selected record.&lt;br /&gt;
:;History&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the user to view the history of changes made to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
::; Database Change History Grid&lt;br /&gt;
::: displays the date/time stamp along with the user that performed any adds, changes and/or deletes to the records being viewed, the new value and the relationship type along with the Screen the action was performed from.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Help&lt;br /&gt;
::provides a brief description of the screen, details and technical data of a specific field. The current screen name is displayed under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; section. Hovering over a field will display help information under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Detail&#039;&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Information Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Contains information about your Epiphany session and the record currently displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:InformationBar.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:; Current User (1)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the user currently logged into Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Shortcuts (2)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Toggles shortcuts (on and off) to commonly used screens.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Server or Computer Name (3)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the server or the computer currently being used to access Epiphany&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record ID (4)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the internal unique ID of the record currently displayed&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record Count (5)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the number of records in the current Filter or Table of records&lt;br /&gt;
:; Unfiltered (6)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays number of filtered records when a filter is in place (when filtered this will toggle to &#039;&#039;&#039;FILTERED SCREEN&#039;&#039;&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
:; No Reason (7)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows for entering a reason changes are being made to a record and records the reason within its history records. Generally, no longer used as Notes are now used.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Notification (8)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays current notifications in system for current user to take action on.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Widgets (9)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays Widget control to create shortcuts to screens and widgets.&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Shortcuts to screens are easily created&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Be on the screen you want to create a shortcut to&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Go into Widget mode&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click [[File:AddShortcut.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click Yes&lt;br /&gt;
:; Theme (10)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows user to change the color scheme and landing screen.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Zoom (11)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows the user to change the zoom percentage of Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Database Name (12)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the database you are currently accessing.  If you have access to more than one Epiphany database, you can double-click this field to switch to another database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen Lookup ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Tool Bar [[File:LookupToolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Text field - standard search&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Filter.png]] = filter on selected search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Select Record -- opens record selected/highlighted&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:ActiveRecords.png]] = active records (toggle to show both Active &amp;amp; Inactive records)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AdvancedSearch.png]] = E-MC2 allows for advanced search (search on any portion of selected field)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:RecordID.png]] = displays unique Record ID&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:SearchByCategory.png]] = search by category then by record by expanding category&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Refresh.png]] = refreshes records displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Clear.png]]  = closes Flex Screen Lookup without selecting record&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Favorites.png]] = displays records you have added to your Favorites list 	&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AddNewRecord.png]] = allows user to add the text in search field box as a new record in the database (must have rights to “add on fly”)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Ascending.png]] and [[File:Descending.png]] = toggles sort order between Ascending/Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Normal behavior&lt;br /&gt;
::* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
::** Default order of columns displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expanding [[File:Expand.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
::** Select Column to sort on&lt;br /&gt;
::** Ascending&lt;br /&gt;
::** Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Additional behavior&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickColumnHeader.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Column Header in a grid (vs. Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left-click Column Header Name to sort&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::::* Ascending/descending Toggle [[File:Ascending.png]] or [[File:Descending.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Scroll Set / Clear &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left to right scrolling of columns&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::*  Clears on close&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickRecord.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Record in a grid (vs. Column Header) &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Copy / Paste&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Moves records in a grid (sets priority only for categorized items)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites (Add/remove) – adds record to Favorites list and displays on default Lookup screen (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Colors – color code records in a grid (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickTableProperties.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click Table Properties [[File:Expand2.png]] or [[File:Expand.png]]   &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show… (temporary; doesn’t save in layout) &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* IDs&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Relationship Types&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Priorities&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites Mode – displays only records added as a Favorite (*)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Row Lines – will show horizontal grid lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Column Lines – will show vertical grid lines (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout (column order &amp;amp; width; per user; does not change default lookup field)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout Filters&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Default Layout – reset to default layout&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Export to File&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Graph&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Navigating and Understanding&lt;br /&gt;
::* Links two records together&lt;br /&gt;
::* Fields with lookups (FlexScreen Lookup) create links to related record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hover mouse to see number of related records [[File:RelatedRecordsHover.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::** The first number is the record currently displayed in the field and the second number is the total number of related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::** To add or remove relationships you must be in Edit mode.[[File:AddRemove.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::*** + allows for adding additional related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::*** - = removes relationship of displayed related record&lt;br /&gt;
::** Double-clicking a related record moves user to that record information&lt;br /&gt;
::** Note:  IMPORTANT to never type over information; you will delete information or change that record in the database (there is no Undo)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Screens ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - displays the Epiphany application with your Company Logo.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Screens:Person|Person]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all companies in your database&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::* Main – company demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::* Addresses – displays all addresses for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Dealer/Distributor – displays dealers and distributors related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AR History – displays accounts receivable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP History – displays accounts payable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Inv History – displays invoice history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Open Orders – displays open orders for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Opportunities – displays status of sales opportunities for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contracts – displays all contracts related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Authorizations – displays authorizations for licensing/subscriptions or other items to track for billing back to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Tasks – displays any tasks in the system related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Activity – displays all contact activity received for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Customer Assets – tracks assets sold to customer&lt;br /&gt;
::* Acct Defaults – displays default billing information and expense account for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Credit Card -- stores credit card information for billing&lt;br /&gt;
::* Affiliations – tracks parent companies and subsidiary companies&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Top Section(Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Order (Inventory Orders) – shortcut to create a new order (auto-fills Ordered By and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create PO (Customer Purchase Orders) – shortcut to create a new purchase order (auto-fills Order From and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sort Name vs. Company Name – Sort Name auto-fills when Company Name field is entered; can be edited to sort differently for searching records&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – link pertinent categories to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Vend# – displays vendor number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cust# – displays customer number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* EIN – displays Employee Identification Number or Federal Tax ID number to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Company Information (Main Tab) – displays address related to company record &lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Contacts (Main Tab) – displays contacts related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
:5.	Logo (Main Tab) – import company’s logo&lt;br /&gt;
:6.	Bottom Section (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Internal contacts managing, services, etc. the related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Num Employees – for recording employee size of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Annual Revenue – for recording annual revenue of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:7. Comment (Main Tab) – displays any comments pertinent to related company record that would not be entered as a note&lt;br /&gt;
:8. Acct Password – displays password associated with related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:9. Print Label (Main Tab) – print an address label to compatible printer&lt;br /&gt;
:10. Filtered (Main Tab) – prints address labels for all records when company records are filtered&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Notes (Main Tab) – add public or private notes and comments to related record&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Addresses Expanded Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all the addresses in the system&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Top Section&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 1 – first line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 2 – second line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* City, ST ZIP – City, State (abbreviated), and Zip code (allows for +4 and foreign)&lt;br /&gt;
::* County – County city is located&lt;br /&gt;
::* Country – default is USA&lt;br /&gt;
::* Map – provide a URL to a map if desired&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Desc – description of address if needed (i.e. Warehouse vs. Office)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Latitude – when an address does not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Longitude – used when an address not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Phone Number &amp;amp; Phone Desc – displays phone for that address (used when multiple addresses are used that have different phone numbers for each location)&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP Location – used for accounts payable invoices/purchase orders&lt;br /&gt;
::* Do not subscribe – opt-out of receiving certain information&lt;br /&gt;
::* Special Info – special notes specific to this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Add Task Button – creates a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Contract Button – creates a new contract&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task History – displays the task history&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Company – displays company for this specific address record (i.e. rental or leased property)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Person – displays contact at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Company – displays company that owns property at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Person – displays contact name of owning company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Tax Key – displays sales tax key to use for this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contract – displays any contracts related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Zone Information – displays zone information related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Notes – add public or private notes and comments to related address&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tasks Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all tasks in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Task View&lt;br /&gt;
::* Active – displays Active tasks only&lt;br /&gt;
::* Completed – displays completed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cancelled – displays cancelled tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Projects – displays all project tasks in system&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hide Tasks with Uncompleted Prerequisites&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Future Tasks – displays tasks with due date in the future&lt;br /&gt;
::* Go To Task# - enter specific task number into text box to open and display a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Print – prints tasks displayed on screen in a report format&lt;br /&gt;
::* Graph – visual graphic of new tasks vs. closed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filtered – displays graph based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Assigned To – displays tasks assigned to criteria selected below&lt;br /&gt;
::* Requested By – displays tasks by person requesting task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Coordinator – displays tasks by Task Coordinator&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Filter – displays data for a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – displays tasks by related category&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Type – displays tasks by related task type&lt;br /&gt;
::* Person – displays tasks by specific person&lt;br /&gt;
::* Department – displays tasks by department&lt;br /&gt;
::* Company – displays tasks by specific company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Mine – displays tasks for user currently logged in&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show All – shows all tasks for your company&lt;br /&gt;
::* New Task – allows for entry of a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting – click on column header(s) to sort in ascending or descending order&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expand [[File:Expand.png]] – show more records/data&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	Activity View – displays all recorded activity for your organization and allows for easy creation of new activity records&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Appointment View – displays appointments scheduled&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date range –display by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Worklog View – displays logged hours based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date Range – displays by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Project View – displays project timelines&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Mileage Log – displays mileage&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1252</id>
		<title>Manual:Basics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1252"/>
		<updated>2024-04-30T19:21:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* File:FilterPresets.png Filter Presets */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen ==&lt;br /&gt;
Flex Screens are the standard Epiphany data entry screens.  They all have the same layout and same features to make your user experience more consistent.  In addition to the data displayed on the screen, there are several design layouts listed below that are common to all Flex Screens.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Title Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The title bar is across the top of the window, and displays the name of the screen you are on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The menu bar is directly below the title bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: The First option is always Applications; provides access to standard screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Menus will differ:&lt;br /&gt;
:*On how Epiphany was configured for your organization,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Individual user rights, and on&lt;br /&gt;
:*What application or menu item you’re in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shortcut Keys – Main Application (differs by Menu, but same concept). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A = Applications (continue to hold Alt and Press A again...)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x2) = AR&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x3) = AP&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+T = Tables&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+I = Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+G = General Ledger&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+P = Payroll&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+U = Utilities&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+S = Setup&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+R = Reports&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+H = Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:For Submenus – Use first letter of Menu Item; if multiples of same beginning letter, press that letter multiple times to move through the menu items beginning with that letter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
: The toolbar is directly below the menu bar, and contains action icons.  Hovering over those icons will display a short description of the function. Icons appear white when available and grayed out when not available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#far:arrow-circle-left}} Back&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Goes back to previous screen&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:chevron-circle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-right}} {{#fas:chevron-circle-right}} Navigation Buttons&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: The outer arrows in a circle move to the first and last records of a table, the white inner arrows advance forward or backward one record&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddDeleteEdit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:fa-plus}} Add&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Immediately adds a new record; complete fields otherwise there will be a blank record in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit; this will remove the newly added record if it has not been saved yet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be removed or merged with an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Yes to delete currently displayed record and merge with an existing record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click No to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MergeDeletedRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record and selecting the record to merge with, confirm deletion and merge, then click Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMergeDeleteRecordsDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: (Clicking No from this screen only deletes the record and does not merge the record with another record)&lt;br /&gt;
: Click no to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Cancel to cancel the deletion&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit and allows any changes to be canceled if the changes have not been saved already.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RefreshSearch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Refresh&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the record to be refreshed to see the most current view of the screen you are currently on.  Generally used when someone is editing the record you are currently viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for lookup of records&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Print.png]] Print&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Print is active on screens that have a standard report defined.  The standard print dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Print Preview&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Found to the right of the Print button; prints the report to screen first for review prior to printing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ActiveRecords.png]] Active Records&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: By default shows only active records...  This is a toggle button and can toggle to show all records or only Active Records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Filter.png]] Filter&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the records to be filtered by any standard field on the current screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Starting with the first field you want to filter on, right-click the data field and select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filter By&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; from the menu. The field will automatically populate the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; grid of the Filter Flex Grid. &lt;br /&gt;
#To select a different &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search Value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button on the right of the object line. Start typing the data you want to filter (keystroke match) and then double-click the selection from the list, and it will repopulate the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search Value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; field. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Submit Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button at the bottom. You are taken back to the screen and the records are now filtered. The status bar at bottom of screen indicates &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FILTERED SCREEN&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#To expand on that filter and add another field to the filter, simply repeat the above steps. &lt;br /&gt;
#To clear the filter, click the Filter icon from the Toolbar, then click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close and Clear Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to filter based on an &amp;quot;OR&amp;quot; statement, after selecting all the fields using the above steps, in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Condition String&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; below the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, replace &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;AND&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where needed with &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Filter Presets&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: To the right of the Filter icon allows the use of saved Filters or removes the current filter to display all records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To save a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filter Preset&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, once you have created your filter, from the Filter Flex Grid showing all &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, at the top left in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Presets&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; field enter a name for your &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Preset&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, then click the green + icon to add/save your &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Preset&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Preset will appear in the dropdown to the right of the Filter icon on the Toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:CaptureImage.png]] Capture Image&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for document scanning with an attached compatible scanner/capture device.  Document is scanned, added to the Documents Table and a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document scanned.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:AttachFile.png]] Attach File&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for a file to be selected from a location on your computer (network drive, local drive, etc.) and attached to the current record.  Again, the document is added to the Documents Table, a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document/file attached.  Note:  this creates a copy of the file and does not remove the file from its original location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OtherActions.png]] Other Actions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;==== &lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to several other actions available if definitions have been created.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Review Duplicate Records&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Record&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Export Data:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Exports data to a file.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Copy Record:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Allows for copying of a record to create a new record to save data entry time if new record is very similar to an existing record. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Mail Merge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Change All Filtered Records:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; From within a filtered screen, this allows the ability to update a specific field containing same data to all of the filtered records. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Open Shortcut&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Record Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific record.&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Screen Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Notifications.png]] Notifications&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: When green, there are unviewed notifications for the user logged in (not specific to the current record on the screen).  Notifications are generated by Document Flow Rules created in the system to notify users when a record has been added, changed, or a note added to a record related to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Object Screen.png]] Object Screen&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: shows each screen related to the object (screen) a user is currently viewing.  This allows a user to quickly switch between related screens and only if user has access to the screen(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchPin.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Search.png]] Global Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows a user to do a global search. The Search Results returned indicate which tables the string of data appears.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Pin.png]] Pin&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a user to pin a screen without opening another instance of Epiphany. The pinned screen will stay open as you open/navigate to other screens. It will stay open until either the pinned screen is closed or the user exits Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Relationships Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to other records related to the current record on the screen.  Item will be bold white when there are related items and grayed out when there are no related objects attached.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RelationshipsBar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:;Relationships&lt;br /&gt;
:: shows all records related to the current record displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Notes&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the capability to attach notes as well as view existing notes related to a record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Documents&lt;br /&gt;
::allows the capability to view all documents related to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Approvals&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows for reviewing and/or signing electronic documents.  Used anytime an electronic signature needs to be captured.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Tasks&lt;br /&gt;
:: displays any active Tasks related to the selected record.&lt;br /&gt;
:;History&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the user to view the history of changes made to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
::; Database Change History Grid&lt;br /&gt;
::: displays the date/time stamp along with the user that performed any adds, changes and/or deletes to the records being viewed, the new value and the relationship type along with the Screen the action was performed from.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Help&lt;br /&gt;
::provides a brief description of the screen, details and technical data of a specific field. The current screen name is displayed under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; section. Hovering over a field will display help information under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Detail&#039;&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Information Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Contains information about your Epiphany session and the record currently displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:InformationBar.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:; Current User (1)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the user currently logged into Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Shortcuts (2)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Toggles shortcuts (on and off) to commonly used screens.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Server or Computer Name (3)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the server or the computer currently being used to access Epiphany&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record ID (4)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the internal unique ID of the record currently displayed&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record Count (5)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the number of records in the current Filter or Table of records&lt;br /&gt;
:; Unfiltered (6)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays number of filtered records when a filter is in place (when filtered this will toggle to &#039;&#039;&#039;FILTERED SCREEN&#039;&#039;&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
:; No Reason (7)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows for entering a reason changes are being made to a record and records the reason within its history records. Generally, no longer used as Notes are now used.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Notification (8)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays current notifications in system for current user to take action on.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Widgets (9)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays Widget control to create shortcuts to screens and widgets.&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Shortcuts to screens are easily created&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Be on the screen you want to create a shortcut to&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Go into Widget mode&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click [[File:AddShortcut.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click Yes&lt;br /&gt;
:; Theme (10)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows user to change the color scheme and landing screen.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Zoom (11)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows the user to change the zoom percentage of Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Database Name (12)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the database you are currently accessing.  If you have access to more than one Epiphany database, you can double-click this field to switch to another database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen Lookup ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Tool Bar [[File:LookupToolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Text field - standard search&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Filter.png]] = filter on selected search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Select Record -- opens record selected/highlighted&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:ActiveRecords.png]] = active records (toggle to show both Active &amp;amp; Inactive records)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AdvancedSearch.png]] = E-MC2 allows for advanced search (search on any portion of selected field)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:RecordID.png]] = displays unique Record ID&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:SearchByCategory.png]] = search by category then by record by expanding category&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Refresh.png]] = refreshes records displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Clear.png]]  = closes Flex Screen Lookup without selecting record&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Favorites.png]] = displays records you have added to your Favorites list 	&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AddNewRecord.png]] = allows user to add the text in search field box as a new record in the database (must have rights to “add on fly”)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Ascending.png]] and [[File:Descending.png]] = toggles sort order between Ascending/Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Normal behavior&lt;br /&gt;
::* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
::** Default order of columns displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expanding [[File:Expand.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
::** Select Column to sort on&lt;br /&gt;
::** Ascending&lt;br /&gt;
::** Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Additional behavior&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickColumnHeader.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Column Header in a grid (vs. Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left-click Column Header Name to sort&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::::* Ascending/descending Toggle [[File:Ascending.png]] or [[File:Descending.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Scroll Set / Clear &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left to right scrolling of columns&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::*  Clears on close&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickRecord.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Record in a grid (vs. Column Header) &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Copy / Paste&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Moves records in a grid (sets priority only for categorized items)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites (Add/remove) – adds record to Favorites list and displays on default Lookup screen (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Colors – color code records in a grid (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickTableProperties.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click Table Properties [[File:Expand2.png]] or [[File:Expand.png]]   &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show… (temporary; doesn’t save in layout) &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* IDs&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Relationship Types&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Priorities&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites Mode – displays only records added as a Favorite (*)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Row Lines – will show horizontal grid lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Column Lines – will show vertical grid lines (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout (column order &amp;amp; width; per user; does not change default lookup field)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout Filters&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Default Layout – reset to default layout&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Export to File&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Graph&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Navigating and Understanding&lt;br /&gt;
::* Links two records together&lt;br /&gt;
::* Fields with lookups (FlexScreen Lookup) create links to related record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hover mouse to see number of related records [[File:RelatedRecordsHover.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::** The first number is the record currently displayed in the field and the second number is the total number of related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::** To add or remove relationships you must be in Edit mode.[[File:AddRemove.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::*** + allows for adding additional related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::*** - = removes relationship of displayed related record&lt;br /&gt;
::** Double-clicking a related record moves user to that record information&lt;br /&gt;
::** Note:  IMPORTANT to never type over information; you will delete information or change that record in the database (there is no Undo)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Screens ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - displays the Epiphany application with your Company Logo.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Screens:Person|Person]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all companies in your database&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::* Main – company demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::* Addresses – displays all addresses for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Dealer/Distributor – displays dealers and distributors related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AR History – displays accounts receivable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP History – displays accounts payable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Inv History – displays invoice history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Open Orders – displays open orders for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Opportunities – displays status of sales opportunities for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contracts – displays all contracts related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Authorizations – displays authorizations for licensing/subscriptions or other items to track for billing back to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Tasks – displays any tasks in the system related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Activity – displays all contact activity received for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Customer Assets – tracks assets sold to customer&lt;br /&gt;
::* Acct Defaults – displays default billing information and expense account for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Credit Card -- stores credit card information for billing&lt;br /&gt;
::* Affiliations – tracks parent companies and subsidiary companies&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Top Section(Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Order (Inventory Orders) – shortcut to create a new order (auto-fills Ordered By and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create PO (Customer Purchase Orders) – shortcut to create a new purchase order (auto-fills Order From and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sort Name vs. Company Name – Sort Name auto-fills when Company Name field is entered; can be edited to sort differently for searching records&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – link pertinent categories to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Vend# – displays vendor number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cust# – displays customer number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* EIN – displays Employee Identification Number or Federal Tax ID number to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Company Information (Main Tab) – displays address related to company record &lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Contacts (Main Tab) – displays contacts related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
:5.	Logo (Main Tab) – import company’s logo&lt;br /&gt;
:6.	Bottom Section (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Internal contacts managing, services, etc. the related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Num Employees – for recording employee size of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Annual Revenue – for recording annual revenue of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:7. Comment (Main Tab) – displays any comments pertinent to related company record that would not be entered as a note&lt;br /&gt;
:8. Acct Password – displays password associated with related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:9. Print Label (Main Tab) – print an address label to compatible printer&lt;br /&gt;
:10. Filtered (Main Tab) – prints address labels for all records when company records are filtered&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Notes (Main Tab) – add public or private notes and comments to related record&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Addresses Expanded Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all the addresses in the system&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Top Section&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 1 – first line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 2 – second line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* City, ST ZIP – City, State (abbreviated), and Zip code (allows for +4 and foreign)&lt;br /&gt;
::* County – County city is located&lt;br /&gt;
::* Country – default is USA&lt;br /&gt;
::* Map – provide a URL to a map if desired&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Desc – description of address if needed (i.e. Warehouse vs. Office)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Latitude – when an address does not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Longitude – used when an address not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Phone Number &amp;amp; Phone Desc – displays phone for that address (used when multiple addresses are used that have different phone numbers for each location)&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP Location – used for accounts payable invoices/purchase orders&lt;br /&gt;
::* Do not subscribe – opt-out of receiving certain information&lt;br /&gt;
::* Special Info – special notes specific to this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Add Task Button – creates a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Contract Button – creates a new contract&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task History – displays the task history&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Company – displays company for this specific address record (i.e. rental or leased property)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Person – displays contact at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Company – displays company that owns property at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Person – displays contact name of owning company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Tax Key – displays sales tax key to use for this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contract – displays any contracts related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Zone Information – displays zone information related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Notes – add public or private notes and comments to related address&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tasks Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all tasks in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Task View&lt;br /&gt;
::* Active – displays Active tasks only&lt;br /&gt;
::* Completed – displays completed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cancelled – displays cancelled tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Projects – displays all project tasks in system&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hide Tasks with Uncompleted Prerequisites&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Future Tasks – displays tasks with due date in the future&lt;br /&gt;
::* Go To Task# - enter specific task number into text box to open and display a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Print – prints tasks displayed on screen in a report format&lt;br /&gt;
::* Graph – visual graphic of new tasks vs. closed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filtered – displays graph based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Assigned To – displays tasks assigned to criteria selected below&lt;br /&gt;
::* Requested By – displays tasks by person requesting task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Coordinator – displays tasks by Task Coordinator&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Filter – displays data for a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – displays tasks by related category&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Type – displays tasks by related task type&lt;br /&gt;
::* Person – displays tasks by specific person&lt;br /&gt;
::* Department – displays tasks by department&lt;br /&gt;
::* Company – displays tasks by specific company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Mine – displays tasks for user currently logged in&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show All – shows all tasks for your company&lt;br /&gt;
::* New Task – allows for entry of a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting – click on column header(s) to sort in ascending or descending order&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expand [[File:Expand.png]] – show more records/data&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	Activity View – displays all recorded activity for your organization and allows for easy creation of new activity records&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Appointment View – displays appointments scheduled&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date range –display by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Worklog View – displays logged hours based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date Range – displays by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Project View – displays project timelines&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Mileage Log – displays mileage&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1251</id>
		<title>Manual:Basics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1251"/>
		<updated>2024-04-30T19:08:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* File:Filter.png Filter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen ==&lt;br /&gt;
Flex Screens are the standard Epiphany data entry screens.  They all have the same layout and same features to make your user experience more consistent.  In addition to the data displayed on the screen, there are several design layouts listed below that are common to all Flex Screens.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Title Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The title bar is across the top of the window, and displays the name of the screen you are on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The menu bar is directly below the title bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: The First option is always Applications; provides access to standard screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Menus will differ:&lt;br /&gt;
:*On how Epiphany was configured for your organization,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Individual user rights, and on&lt;br /&gt;
:*What application or menu item you’re in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shortcut Keys – Main Application (differs by Menu, but same concept). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A = Applications (continue to hold Alt and Press A again...)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x2) = AR&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x3) = AP&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+T = Tables&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+I = Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+G = General Ledger&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+P = Payroll&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+U = Utilities&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+S = Setup&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+R = Reports&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+H = Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:For Submenus – Use first letter of Menu Item; if multiples of same beginning letter, press that letter multiple times to move through the menu items beginning with that letter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
: The toolbar is directly below the menu bar, and contains action icons.  Hovering over those icons will display a short description of the function. Icons appear white when available and grayed out when not available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#far:arrow-circle-left}} Back&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Goes back to previous screen&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:chevron-circle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-right}} {{#fas:chevron-circle-right}} Navigation Buttons&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: The outer arrows in a circle move to the first and last records of a table, the white inner arrows advance forward or backward one record&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddDeleteEdit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:fa-plus}} Add&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Immediately adds a new record; complete fields otherwise there will be a blank record in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit; this will remove the newly added record if it has not been saved yet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be removed or merged with an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Yes to delete currently displayed record and merge with an existing record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click No to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MergeDeletedRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record and selecting the record to merge with, confirm deletion and merge, then click Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMergeDeleteRecordsDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: (Clicking No from this screen only deletes the record and does not merge the record with another record)&lt;br /&gt;
: Click no to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Cancel to cancel the deletion&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit and allows any changes to be canceled if the changes have not been saved already.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RefreshSearch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Refresh&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the record to be refreshed to see the most current view of the screen you are currently on.  Generally used when someone is editing the record you are currently viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for lookup of records&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Print.png]] Print&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Print is active on screens that have a standard report defined.  The standard print dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Print Preview&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Found to the right of the Print button; prints the report to screen first for review prior to printing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ActiveRecords.png]] Active Records&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: By default shows only active records...  This is a toggle button and can toggle to show all records or only Active Records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Filter.png]] Filter&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the records to be filtered by any standard field on the current screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Starting with the first field you want to filter on, right-click the data field and select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filter By&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; from the menu. The field will automatically populate the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; grid of the Filter Flex Grid. &lt;br /&gt;
#To select a different &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search Value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button on the right of the object line. Start typing the data you want to filter (keystroke match) and then double-click the selection from the list, and it will repopulate the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Search Value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; field. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Submit Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button at the bottom. You are taken back to the screen and the records are now filtered. The status bar at bottom of screen indicates &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FILTERED SCREEN&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#To expand on that filter and add another field to the filter, simply repeat the above steps. &lt;br /&gt;
#To clear the filter, click the Filter icon from the Toolbar, then click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Close and Clear Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to filter based on an &amp;quot;OR&amp;quot; statement, after selecting all the fields using the above steps, in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Condition String&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; below the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Filtered Fields&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, replace &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;AND&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where needed with &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;OR&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Filter Presets&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: To the right of the Filter icon allows the use of saved Filters or removes the current filter to display all records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:CaptureImage.png]] Capture Image&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for document scanning with an attached compatible scanner/capture device.  Document is scanned, added to the Documents Table and a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document scanned.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:AttachFile.png]] Attach File&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for a file to be selected from a location on your computer (network drive, local drive, etc.) and attached to the current record.  Again, the document is added to the Documents Table, a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document/file attached.  Note:  this creates a copy of the file and does not remove the file from its original location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OtherActions.png]] Other Actions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;==== &lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to several other actions available if definitions have been created.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Review Duplicate Records&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Record&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Export Data:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Exports data to a file.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Copy Record:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Allows for copying of a record to create a new record to save data entry time if new record is very similar to an existing record. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Mail Merge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Change All Filtered Records:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; From within a filtered screen, this allows the ability to update a specific field containing same data to all of the filtered records. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Open Shortcut&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Record Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific record.&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Screen Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Notifications.png]] Notifications&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: When green, there are unviewed notifications for the user logged in (not specific to the current record on the screen).  Notifications are generated by Document Flow Rules created in the system to notify users when a record has been added, changed, or a note added to a record related to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Object Screen.png]] Object Screen&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: shows each screen related to the object (screen) a user is currently viewing.  This allows a user to quickly switch between related screens and only if user has access to the screen(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchPin.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Search.png]] Global Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows a user to do a global search. The Search Results returned indicate which tables the string of data appears.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Pin.png]] Pin&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a user to pin a screen without opening another instance of Epiphany. The pinned screen will stay open as you open/navigate to other screens. It will stay open until either the pinned screen is closed or the user exits Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Relationships Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to other records related to the current record on the screen.  Item will be bold white when there are related items and grayed out when there are no related objects attached.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RelationshipsBar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:;Relationships&lt;br /&gt;
:: shows all records related to the current record displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Notes&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the capability to attach notes as well as view existing notes related to a record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Documents&lt;br /&gt;
::allows the capability to view all documents related to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Approvals&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows for reviewing and/or signing electronic documents.  Used anytime an electronic signature needs to be captured.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Tasks&lt;br /&gt;
:: displays any active Tasks related to the selected record.&lt;br /&gt;
:;History&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the user to view the history of changes made to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
::; Database Change History Grid&lt;br /&gt;
::: displays the date/time stamp along with the user that performed any adds, changes and/or deletes to the records being viewed, the new value and the relationship type along with the Screen the action was performed from.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Help&lt;br /&gt;
::provides a brief description of the screen, details and technical data of a specific field. The current screen name is displayed under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; section. Hovering over a field will display help information under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Detail&#039;&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Information Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Contains information about your Epiphany session and the record currently displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:InformationBar.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:; Current User (1)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the user currently logged into Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Shortcuts (2)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Toggles shortcuts (on and off) to commonly used screens.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Server or Computer Name (3)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the server or the computer currently being used to access Epiphany&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record ID (4)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the internal unique ID of the record currently displayed&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record Count (5)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the number of records in the current Filter or Table of records&lt;br /&gt;
:; Unfiltered (6)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays number of filtered records when a filter is in place (when filtered this will toggle to &#039;&#039;&#039;FILTERED SCREEN&#039;&#039;&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
:; No Reason (7)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows for entering a reason changes are being made to a record and records the reason within its history records. Generally, no longer used as Notes are now used.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Notification (8)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays current notifications in system for current user to take action on.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Widgets (9)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays Widget control to create shortcuts to screens and widgets.&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Shortcuts to screens are easily created&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Be on the screen you want to create a shortcut to&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Go into Widget mode&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click [[File:AddShortcut.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click Yes&lt;br /&gt;
:; Theme (10)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows user to change the color scheme and landing screen.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Zoom (11)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows the user to change the zoom percentage of Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Database Name (12)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the database you are currently accessing.  If you have access to more than one Epiphany database, you can double-click this field to switch to another database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen Lookup ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Tool Bar [[File:LookupToolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Text field - standard search&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Filter.png]] = filter on selected search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Select Record -- opens record selected/highlighted&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:ActiveRecords.png]] = active records (toggle to show both Active &amp;amp; Inactive records)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AdvancedSearch.png]] = E-MC2 allows for advanced search (search on any portion of selected field)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:RecordID.png]] = displays unique Record ID&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:SearchByCategory.png]] = search by category then by record by expanding category&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Refresh.png]] = refreshes records displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Clear.png]]  = closes Flex Screen Lookup without selecting record&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Favorites.png]] = displays records you have added to your Favorites list 	&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AddNewRecord.png]] = allows user to add the text in search field box as a new record in the database (must have rights to “add on fly”)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Ascending.png]] and [[File:Descending.png]] = toggles sort order between Ascending/Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Normal behavior&lt;br /&gt;
::* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
::** Default order of columns displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expanding [[File:Expand.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
::** Select Column to sort on&lt;br /&gt;
::** Ascending&lt;br /&gt;
::** Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Additional behavior&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickColumnHeader.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Column Header in a grid (vs. Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left-click Column Header Name to sort&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::::* Ascending/descending Toggle [[File:Ascending.png]] or [[File:Descending.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Scroll Set / Clear &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left to right scrolling of columns&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::*  Clears on close&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickRecord.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Record in a grid (vs. Column Header) &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Copy / Paste&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Moves records in a grid (sets priority only for categorized items)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites (Add/remove) – adds record to Favorites list and displays on default Lookup screen (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Colors – color code records in a grid (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickTableProperties.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click Table Properties [[File:Expand2.png]] or [[File:Expand.png]]   &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show… (temporary; doesn’t save in layout) &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* IDs&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Relationship Types&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Priorities&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites Mode – displays only records added as a Favorite (*)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Row Lines – will show horizontal grid lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Column Lines – will show vertical grid lines (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout (column order &amp;amp; width; per user; does not change default lookup field)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout Filters&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Default Layout – reset to default layout&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Export to File&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Graph&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Navigating and Understanding&lt;br /&gt;
::* Links two records together&lt;br /&gt;
::* Fields with lookups (FlexScreen Lookup) create links to related record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hover mouse to see number of related records [[File:RelatedRecordsHover.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::** The first number is the record currently displayed in the field and the second number is the total number of related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::** To add or remove relationships you must be in Edit mode.[[File:AddRemove.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::*** + allows for adding additional related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::*** - = removes relationship of displayed related record&lt;br /&gt;
::** Double-clicking a related record moves user to that record information&lt;br /&gt;
::** Note:  IMPORTANT to never type over information; you will delete information or change that record in the database (there is no Undo)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Screens ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - displays the Epiphany application with your Company Logo.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Screens:Person|Person]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all companies in your database&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::* Main – company demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::* Addresses – displays all addresses for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Dealer/Distributor – displays dealers and distributors related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AR History – displays accounts receivable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP History – displays accounts payable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Inv History – displays invoice history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Open Orders – displays open orders for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Opportunities – displays status of sales opportunities for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contracts – displays all contracts related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Authorizations – displays authorizations for licensing/subscriptions or other items to track for billing back to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Tasks – displays any tasks in the system related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Activity – displays all contact activity received for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Customer Assets – tracks assets sold to customer&lt;br /&gt;
::* Acct Defaults – displays default billing information and expense account for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Credit Card -- stores credit card information for billing&lt;br /&gt;
::* Affiliations – tracks parent companies and subsidiary companies&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Top Section(Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Order (Inventory Orders) – shortcut to create a new order (auto-fills Ordered By and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create PO (Customer Purchase Orders) – shortcut to create a new purchase order (auto-fills Order From and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sort Name vs. Company Name – Sort Name auto-fills when Company Name field is entered; can be edited to sort differently for searching records&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – link pertinent categories to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Vend# – displays vendor number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cust# – displays customer number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* EIN – displays Employee Identification Number or Federal Tax ID number to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Company Information (Main Tab) – displays address related to company record &lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Contacts (Main Tab) – displays contacts related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
:5.	Logo (Main Tab) – import company’s logo&lt;br /&gt;
:6.	Bottom Section (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Internal contacts managing, services, etc. the related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Num Employees – for recording employee size of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Annual Revenue – for recording annual revenue of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:7. Comment (Main Tab) – displays any comments pertinent to related company record that would not be entered as a note&lt;br /&gt;
:8. Acct Password – displays password associated with related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:9. Print Label (Main Tab) – print an address label to compatible printer&lt;br /&gt;
:10. Filtered (Main Tab) – prints address labels for all records when company records are filtered&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Notes (Main Tab) – add public or private notes and comments to related record&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Addresses Expanded Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all the addresses in the system&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Top Section&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 1 – first line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 2 – second line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* City, ST ZIP – City, State (abbreviated), and Zip code (allows for +4 and foreign)&lt;br /&gt;
::* County – County city is located&lt;br /&gt;
::* Country – default is USA&lt;br /&gt;
::* Map – provide a URL to a map if desired&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Desc – description of address if needed (i.e. Warehouse vs. Office)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Latitude – when an address does not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Longitude – used when an address not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Phone Number &amp;amp; Phone Desc – displays phone for that address (used when multiple addresses are used that have different phone numbers for each location)&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP Location – used for accounts payable invoices/purchase orders&lt;br /&gt;
::* Do not subscribe – opt-out of receiving certain information&lt;br /&gt;
::* Special Info – special notes specific to this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Add Task Button – creates a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Contract Button – creates a new contract&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task History – displays the task history&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Company – displays company for this specific address record (i.e. rental or leased property)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Person – displays contact at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Company – displays company that owns property at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Person – displays contact name of owning company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Tax Key – displays sales tax key to use for this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contract – displays any contracts related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Zone Information – displays zone information related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Notes – add public or private notes and comments to related address&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tasks Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all tasks in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Task View&lt;br /&gt;
::* Active – displays Active tasks only&lt;br /&gt;
::* Completed – displays completed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cancelled – displays cancelled tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Projects – displays all project tasks in system&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hide Tasks with Uncompleted Prerequisites&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Future Tasks – displays tasks with due date in the future&lt;br /&gt;
::* Go To Task# - enter specific task number into text box to open and display a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Print – prints tasks displayed on screen in a report format&lt;br /&gt;
::* Graph – visual graphic of new tasks vs. closed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filtered – displays graph based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Assigned To – displays tasks assigned to criteria selected below&lt;br /&gt;
::* Requested By – displays tasks by person requesting task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Coordinator – displays tasks by Task Coordinator&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Filter – displays data for a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – displays tasks by related category&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Type – displays tasks by related task type&lt;br /&gt;
::* Person – displays tasks by specific person&lt;br /&gt;
::* Department – displays tasks by department&lt;br /&gt;
::* Company – displays tasks by specific company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Mine – displays tasks for user currently logged in&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show All – shows all tasks for your company&lt;br /&gt;
::* New Task – allows for entry of a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting – click on column header(s) to sort in ascending or descending order&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expand [[File:Expand.png]] – show more records/data&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	Activity View – displays all recorded activity for your organization and allows for easy creation of new activity records&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Appointment View – displays appointments scheduled&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date range –display by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Worklog View – displays logged hours based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date Range – displays by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Project View – displays project timelines&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Mileage Log – displays mileage&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1250</id>
		<title>Manual:Basics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1250"/>
		<updated>2024-04-11T20:54:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* File:OtherActions.png Other Actions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen ==&lt;br /&gt;
Flex Screens are the standard Epiphany data entry screens.  They all have the same layout and same features to make your user experience more consistent.  In addition to the data displayed on the screen, there are several design layouts listed below that are common to all Flex Screens.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Title Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The title bar is across the top of the window, and displays the name of the screen you are on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The menu bar is directly below the title bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: The First option is always Applications; provides access to standard screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Menus will differ:&lt;br /&gt;
:*On how Epiphany was configured for your organization,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Individual user rights, and on&lt;br /&gt;
:*What application or menu item you’re in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shortcut Keys – Main Application (differs by Menu, but same concept). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A = Applications (continue to hold Alt and Press A again...)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x2) = AR&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x3) = AP&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+T = Tables&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+I = Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+G = General Ledger&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+P = Payroll&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+U = Utilities&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+S = Setup&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+R = Reports&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+H = Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:For Submenus – Use first letter of Menu Item; if multiples of same beginning letter, press that letter multiple times to move through the menu items beginning with that letter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
: The toolbar is directly below the menu bar, and contains action icons.  Hovering over those icons will display a short description of the function. Icons appear white when available and grayed out when not available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#far:arrow-circle-left}} Back&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Goes back to previous screen&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:chevron-circle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-right}} {{#fas:chevron-circle-right}} Navigation Buttons&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: The outer arrows in a circle move to the first and last records of a table, the white inner arrows advance forward or backward one record&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddDeleteEdit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:fa-plus}} Add&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Immediately adds a new record; complete fields otherwise there will be a blank record in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit; this will remove the newly added record if it has not been saved yet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be removed or merged with an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Yes to delete currently displayed record and merge with an existing record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click No to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MergeDeletedRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record and selecting the record to merge with, confirm deletion and merge, then click Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMergeDeleteRecordsDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: (Clicking No from this screen only deletes the record and does not merge the record with another record)&lt;br /&gt;
: Click no to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Cancel to cancel the deletion&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit and allows any changes to be canceled if the changes have not been saved already.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RefreshSearch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Refresh&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the record to be refreshed to see the most current view of the screen you are currently on.  Generally used when someone is editing the record you are currently viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for lookup of records&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Print.png]] Print&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Print is active on screens that have a standard report defined.  The standard print dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Print Preview&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Found to the right of the Print button; prints the report to screen first for review prior to printing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ActiveRecords.png]] Active Records&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: By default shows only active records...  This is a toggle button and can toggle to show all records or only Active Records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Filter.png]] Filter&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the records to be filtered by any standard field on the current screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Filter Presets&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: To the right of the Filter icon allows the use of saved Filters or removes the current filter to display all records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:CaptureImage.png]] Capture Image&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for document scanning with an attached compatible scanner/capture device.  Document is scanned, added to the Documents Table and a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document scanned.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:AttachFile.png]] Attach File&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for a file to be selected from a location on your computer (network drive, local drive, etc.) and attached to the current record.  Again, the document is added to the Documents Table, a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document/file attached.  Note:  this creates a copy of the file and does not remove the file from its original location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OtherActions.png]] Other Actions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;==== &lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to several other actions available if definitions have been created.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Filter&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Review Duplicate Records&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Duplicate Record&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Export Data:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Exports data to a file.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Copy Record:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Allows for copying of a record to create a new record to save data entry time if new record is very similar to an existing record. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Mail Merge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Change All Filtered Records:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; From within a filtered screen, this allows the ability to update a specific field containing same data to all of the filtered records. &lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Open Shortcut&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Record Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific record.&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save Screen Shortcut:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Creates a shortcut that can be saved to the local computer for quick access to a specific screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Notifications.png]] Notifications&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: When green, there are unviewed notifications for the user logged in (not specific to the current record on the screen).  Notifications are generated by Document Flow Rules created in the system to notify users when a record has been added, changed, or a note added to a record related to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Object Screen.png]] Object Screen&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: shows each screen related to the object (screen) a user is currently viewing.  This allows a user to quickly switch between related screens and only if user has access to the screen(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchPin.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Search.png]] Global Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows a user to do a global search. The Search Results returned indicate which tables the string of data appears.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Pin.png]] Pin&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a user to pin a screen without opening another instance of Epiphany. The pinned screen will stay open as you open/navigate to other screens. It will stay open until either the pinned screen is closed or the user exits Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Relationships Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to other records related to the current record on the screen.  Item will be bold white when there are related items and grayed out when there are no related objects attached.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RelationshipsBar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:;Relationships&lt;br /&gt;
:: shows all records related to the current record displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Notes&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the capability to attach notes as well as view existing notes related to a record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Documents&lt;br /&gt;
::allows the capability to view all documents related to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Approvals&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows for reviewing and/or signing electronic documents.  Used anytime an electronic signature needs to be captured.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Tasks&lt;br /&gt;
:: displays any active Tasks related to the selected record.&lt;br /&gt;
:;History&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the user to view the history of changes made to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
::; Database Change History Grid&lt;br /&gt;
::: displays the date/time stamp along with the user that performed any adds, changes and/or deletes to the records being viewed, the new value and the relationship type along with the Screen the action was performed from.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Help&lt;br /&gt;
::provides a brief description of the screen, details and technical data of a specific field. The current screen name is displayed under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; section. Hovering over a field will display help information under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Detail&#039;&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Information Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Contains information about your Epiphany session and the record currently displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:InformationBar.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:; Current User (1)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the user currently logged into Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Shortcuts (2)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Toggles shortcuts (on and off) to commonly used screens.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Server or Computer Name (3)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the server or the computer currently being used to access Epiphany&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record ID (4)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the internal unique ID of the record currently displayed&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record Count (5)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the number of records in the current Filter or Table of records&lt;br /&gt;
:; Unfiltered (6)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays number of filtered records when a filter is in place (when filtered this will toggle to &#039;&#039;&#039;FILTERED SCREEN&#039;&#039;&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
:; No Reason (7)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows for entering a reason changes are being made to a record and records the reason within its history records. Generally, no longer used as Notes are now used.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Notification (8)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays current notifications in system for current user to take action on.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Widgets (9)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays Widget control to create shortcuts to screens and widgets.&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Shortcuts to screens are easily created&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Be on the screen you want to create a shortcut to&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Go into Widget mode&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click [[File:AddShortcut.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click Yes&lt;br /&gt;
:; Theme (10)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows user to change the color scheme and landing screen.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Zoom (11)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows the user to change the zoom percentage of Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Database Name (12)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the database you are currently accessing.  If you have access to more than one Epiphany database, you can double-click this field to switch to another database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen Lookup ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Tool Bar [[File:LookupToolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Text field - standard search&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Filter.png]] = filter on selected search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Select Record -- opens record selected/highlighted&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:ActiveRecords.png]] = active records (toggle to show both Active &amp;amp; Inactive records)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AdvancedSearch.png]] = E-MC2 allows for advanced search (search on any portion of selected field)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:RecordID.png]] = displays unique Record ID&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:SearchByCategory.png]] = search by category then by record by expanding category&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Refresh.png]] = refreshes records displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Clear.png]]  = closes Flex Screen Lookup without selecting record&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Favorites.png]] = displays records you have added to your Favorites list 	&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AddNewRecord.png]] = allows user to add the text in search field box as a new record in the database (must have rights to “add on fly”)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Ascending.png]] and [[File:Descending.png]] = toggles sort order between Ascending/Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Normal behavior&lt;br /&gt;
::* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
::** Default order of columns displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expanding [[File:Expand.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
::** Select Column to sort on&lt;br /&gt;
::** Ascending&lt;br /&gt;
::** Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Additional behavior&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickColumnHeader.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Column Header in a grid (vs. Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left-click Column Header Name to sort&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::::* Ascending/descending Toggle [[File:Ascending.png]] or [[File:Descending.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Scroll Set / Clear &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left to right scrolling of columns&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::*  Clears on close&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickRecord.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Record in a grid (vs. Column Header) &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Copy / Paste&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Moves records in a grid (sets priority only for categorized items)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites (Add/remove) – adds record to Favorites list and displays on default Lookup screen (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Colors – color code records in a grid (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickTableProperties.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click Table Properties [[File:Expand2.png]] or [[File:Expand.png]]   &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show… (temporary; doesn’t save in layout) &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* IDs&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Relationship Types&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Priorities&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites Mode – displays only records added as a Favorite (*)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Row Lines – will show horizontal grid lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Column Lines – will show vertical grid lines (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout (column order &amp;amp; width; per user; does not change default lookup field)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout Filters&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Default Layout – reset to default layout&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Export to File&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Graph&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Navigating and Understanding&lt;br /&gt;
::* Links two records together&lt;br /&gt;
::* Fields with lookups (FlexScreen Lookup) create links to related record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hover mouse to see number of related records [[File:RelatedRecordsHover.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::** The first number is the record currently displayed in the field and the second number is the total number of related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::** To add or remove relationships you must be in Edit mode.[[File:AddRemove.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::*** + allows for adding additional related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::*** - = removes relationship of displayed related record&lt;br /&gt;
::** Double-clicking a related record moves user to that record information&lt;br /&gt;
::** Note:  IMPORTANT to never type over information; you will delete information or change that record in the database (there is no Undo)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Screens ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - displays the Epiphany application with your Company Logo.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Screens:Person|Person]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all companies in your database&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::* Main – company demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::* Addresses – displays all addresses for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Dealer/Distributor – displays dealers and distributors related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AR History – displays accounts receivable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP History – displays accounts payable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Inv History – displays invoice history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Open Orders – displays open orders for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Opportunities – displays status of sales opportunities for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contracts – displays all contracts related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Authorizations – displays authorizations for licensing/subscriptions or other items to track for billing back to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Tasks – displays any tasks in the system related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Activity – displays all contact activity received for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Customer Assets – tracks assets sold to customer&lt;br /&gt;
::* Acct Defaults – displays default billing information and expense account for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Credit Card -- stores credit card information for billing&lt;br /&gt;
::* Affiliations – tracks parent companies and subsidiary companies&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Top Section(Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Order (Inventory Orders) – shortcut to create a new order (auto-fills Ordered By and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create PO (Customer Purchase Orders) – shortcut to create a new purchase order (auto-fills Order From and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sort Name vs. Company Name – Sort Name auto-fills when Company Name field is entered; can be edited to sort differently for searching records&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – link pertinent categories to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Vend# – displays vendor number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cust# – displays customer number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* EIN – displays Employee Identification Number or Federal Tax ID number to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Company Information (Main Tab) – displays address related to company record &lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Contacts (Main Tab) – displays contacts related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
:5.	Logo (Main Tab) – import company’s logo&lt;br /&gt;
:6.	Bottom Section (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Internal contacts managing, services, etc. the related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Num Employees – for recording employee size of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Annual Revenue – for recording annual revenue of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:7. Comment (Main Tab) – displays any comments pertinent to related company record that would not be entered as a note&lt;br /&gt;
:8. Acct Password – displays password associated with related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:9. Print Label (Main Tab) – print an address label to compatible printer&lt;br /&gt;
:10. Filtered (Main Tab) – prints address labels for all records when company records are filtered&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Notes (Main Tab) – add public or private notes and comments to related record&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Addresses Expanded Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all the addresses in the system&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Top Section&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 1 – first line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 2 – second line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* City, ST ZIP – City, State (abbreviated), and Zip code (allows for +4 and foreign)&lt;br /&gt;
::* County – County city is located&lt;br /&gt;
::* Country – default is USA&lt;br /&gt;
::* Map – provide a URL to a map if desired&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Desc – description of address if needed (i.e. Warehouse vs. Office)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Latitude – when an address does not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Longitude – used when an address not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Phone Number &amp;amp; Phone Desc – displays phone for that address (used when multiple addresses are used that have different phone numbers for each location)&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP Location – used for accounts payable invoices/purchase orders&lt;br /&gt;
::* Do not subscribe – opt-out of receiving certain information&lt;br /&gt;
::* Special Info – special notes specific to this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Add Task Button – creates a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Contract Button – creates a new contract&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task History – displays the task history&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Company – displays company for this specific address record (i.e. rental or leased property)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Person – displays contact at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Company – displays company that owns property at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Person – displays contact name of owning company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Tax Key – displays sales tax key to use for this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contract – displays any contracts related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Zone Information – displays zone information related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Notes – add public or private notes and comments to related address&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tasks Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all tasks in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Task View&lt;br /&gt;
::* Active – displays Active tasks only&lt;br /&gt;
::* Completed – displays completed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cancelled – displays cancelled tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Projects – displays all project tasks in system&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hide Tasks with Uncompleted Prerequisites&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Future Tasks – displays tasks with due date in the future&lt;br /&gt;
::* Go To Task# - enter specific task number into text box to open and display a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Print – prints tasks displayed on screen in a report format&lt;br /&gt;
::* Graph – visual graphic of new tasks vs. closed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filtered – displays graph based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Assigned To – displays tasks assigned to criteria selected below&lt;br /&gt;
::* Requested By – displays tasks by person requesting task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Coordinator – displays tasks by Task Coordinator&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Filter – displays data for a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – displays tasks by related category&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Type – displays tasks by related task type&lt;br /&gt;
::* Person – displays tasks by specific person&lt;br /&gt;
::* Department – displays tasks by department&lt;br /&gt;
::* Company – displays tasks by specific company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Mine – displays tasks for user currently logged in&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show All – shows all tasks for your company&lt;br /&gt;
::* New Task – allows for entry of a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting – click on column header(s) to sort in ascending or descending order&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expand [[File:Expand.png]] – show more records/data&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	Activity View – displays all recorded activity for your organization and allows for easy creation of new activity records&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Appointment View – displays appointments scheduled&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date range –display by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Worklog View – displays logged hours based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date Range – displays by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Project View – displays project timelines&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Mileage Log – displays mileage&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1249</id>
		<title>Manual:Basics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1249"/>
		<updated>2024-04-11T20:32:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Toolbar */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen ==&lt;br /&gt;
Flex Screens are the standard Epiphany data entry screens.  They all have the same layout and same features to make your user experience more consistent.  In addition to the data displayed on the screen, there are several design layouts listed below that are common to all Flex Screens.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Title Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The title bar is across the top of the window, and displays the name of the screen you are on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The menu bar is directly below the title bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: The First option is always Applications; provides access to standard screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Menus will differ:&lt;br /&gt;
:*On how Epiphany was configured for your organization,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Individual user rights, and on&lt;br /&gt;
:*What application or menu item you’re in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shortcut Keys – Main Application (differs by Menu, but same concept). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A = Applications (continue to hold Alt and Press A again...)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x2) = AR&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x3) = AP&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+T = Tables&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+I = Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+G = General Ledger&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+P = Payroll&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+U = Utilities&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+S = Setup&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+R = Reports&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+H = Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:For Submenus – Use first letter of Menu Item; if multiples of same beginning letter, press that letter multiple times to move through the menu items beginning with that letter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
: The toolbar is directly below the menu bar, and contains action icons.  Hovering over those icons will display a short description of the function. Icons appear white when available and grayed out when not available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#far:arrow-circle-left}} Back&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Goes back to previous screen&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:chevron-circle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-right}} {{#fas:chevron-circle-right}} Navigation Buttons&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: The outer arrows in a circle move to the first and last records of a table, the white inner arrows advance forward or backward one record&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddDeleteEdit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:fa-plus}} Add&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Immediately adds a new record; complete fields otherwise there will be a blank record in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit; this will remove the newly added record if it has not been saved yet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be removed or merged with an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Yes to delete currently displayed record and merge with an existing record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click No to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MergeDeletedRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record and selecting the record to merge with, confirm deletion and merge, then click Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMergeDeleteRecordsDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: (Clicking No from this screen only deletes the record and does not merge the record with another record)&lt;br /&gt;
: Click no to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Cancel to cancel the deletion&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit and allows any changes to be canceled if the changes have not been saved already.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RefreshSearch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Refresh&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the record to be refreshed to see the most current view of the screen you are currently on.  Generally used when someone is editing the record you are currently viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for lookup of records&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Print.png]] Print&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Print is active on screens that have a standard report defined.  The standard print dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Print Preview&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Found to the right of the Print button; prints the report to screen first for review prior to printing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ActiveRecords.png]] Active Records&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: By default shows only active records...  This is a toggle button and can toggle to show all records or only Active Records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Filter.png]] Filter&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the records to be filtered by any standard field on the current screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Filter Presets&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: To the right of the Filter icon allows the use of saved Filters or removes the current filter to display all records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:CaptureImage.png]] Capture Image&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for document scanning with an attached compatible scanner/capture device.  Document is scanned, added to the Documents Table and a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document scanned.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:AttachFile.png]] Attach File&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for a file to be selected from a location on your computer (network drive, local drive, etc.) and attached to the current record.  Again, the document is added to the Documents Table, a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document/file attached.  Note:  this creates a copy of the file and does not remove the file from its original location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OtherActions.png]] Other Actions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;==== &lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to several other actions available if definitions have been created.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Notifications.png]] Notifications&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: When green, there are unviewed notifications for the user logged in (not specific to the current record on the screen).  Notifications are generated by Document Flow Rules created in the system to notify users when a record has been added, changed, or a note added to a record related to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Object Screen.png]] Object Screen&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: shows each screen related to the object (screen) a user is currently viewing.  This allows a user to quickly switch between related screens and only if user has access to the screen(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchPin.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Search.png]] Global Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows a user to do a global search. The Search Results returned indicate which tables the string of data appears.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Pin.png]] Pin&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a user to pin a screen without opening another instance of Epiphany. The pinned screen will stay open as you open/navigate to other screens. It will stay open until either the pinned screen is closed or the user exits Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Relationships Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to other records related to the current record on the screen.  Item will be bold white when there are related items and grayed out when there are no related objects attached.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RelationshipsBar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:;Relationships&lt;br /&gt;
:: shows all records related to the current record displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Notes&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the capability to attach notes as well as view existing notes related to a record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Documents&lt;br /&gt;
::allows the capability to view all documents related to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Approvals&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows for reviewing and/or signing electronic documents.  Used anytime an electronic signature needs to be captured.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Tasks&lt;br /&gt;
:: displays any active Tasks related to the selected record.&lt;br /&gt;
:;History&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the user to view the history of changes made to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
::; Database Change History Grid&lt;br /&gt;
::: displays the date/time stamp along with the user that performed any adds, changes and/or deletes to the records being viewed, the new value and the relationship type along with the Screen the action was performed from.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Help&lt;br /&gt;
::provides a brief description of the screen, details and technical data of a specific field. The current screen name is displayed under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; section. Hovering over a field will display help information under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Detail&#039;&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Information Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Contains information about your Epiphany session and the record currently displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:InformationBar.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:; Current User (1)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the user currently logged into Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Shortcuts (2)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Toggles shortcuts (on and off) to commonly used screens.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Server or Computer Name (3)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the server or the computer currently being used to access Epiphany&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record ID (4)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the internal unique ID of the record currently displayed&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record Count (5)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the number of records in the current Filter or Table of records&lt;br /&gt;
:; Unfiltered (6)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays number of filtered records when a filter is in place (when filtered this will toggle to &#039;&#039;&#039;FILTERED SCREEN&#039;&#039;&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
:; No Reason (7)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows for entering a reason changes are being made to a record and records the reason within its history records. Generally, no longer used as Notes are now used.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Notification (8)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays current notifications in system for current user to take action on.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Widgets (9)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays Widget control to create shortcuts to screens and widgets.&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Shortcuts to screens are easily created&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Be on the screen you want to create a shortcut to&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Go into Widget mode&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click [[File:AddShortcut.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click Yes&lt;br /&gt;
:; Theme (10)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows user to change the color scheme and landing screen.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Zoom (11)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows the user to change the zoom percentage of Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Database Name (12)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the database you are currently accessing.  If you have access to more than one Epiphany database, you can double-click this field to switch to another database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen Lookup ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Tool Bar [[File:LookupToolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Text field - standard search&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Filter.png]] = filter on selected search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Select Record -- opens record selected/highlighted&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:ActiveRecords.png]] = active records (toggle to show both Active &amp;amp; Inactive records)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AdvancedSearch.png]] = E-MC2 allows for advanced search (search on any portion of selected field)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:RecordID.png]] = displays unique Record ID&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:SearchByCategory.png]] = search by category then by record by expanding category&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Refresh.png]] = refreshes records displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Clear.png]]  = closes Flex Screen Lookup without selecting record&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Favorites.png]] = displays records you have added to your Favorites list 	&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AddNewRecord.png]] = allows user to add the text in search field box as a new record in the database (must have rights to “add on fly”)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Ascending.png]] and [[File:Descending.png]] = toggles sort order between Ascending/Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Normal behavior&lt;br /&gt;
::* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
::** Default order of columns displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expanding [[File:Expand.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
::** Select Column to sort on&lt;br /&gt;
::** Ascending&lt;br /&gt;
::** Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Additional behavior&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickColumnHeader.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Column Header in a grid (vs. Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left-click Column Header Name to sort&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::::* Ascending/descending Toggle [[File:Ascending.png]] or [[File:Descending.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Scroll Set / Clear &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left to right scrolling of columns&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::*  Clears on close&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickRecord.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Record in a grid (vs. Column Header) &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Copy / Paste&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Moves records in a grid (sets priority only for categorized items)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites (Add/remove) – adds record to Favorites list and displays on default Lookup screen (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Colors – color code records in a grid (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickTableProperties.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click Table Properties [[File:Expand2.png]] or [[File:Expand.png]]   &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show… (temporary; doesn’t save in layout) &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* IDs&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Relationship Types&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Priorities&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites Mode – displays only records added as a Favorite (*)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Row Lines – will show horizontal grid lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Column Lines – will show vertical grid lines (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout (column order &amp;amp; width; per user; does not change default lookup field)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout Filters&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Default Layout – reset to default layout&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Export to File&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Graph&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Navigating and Understanding&lt;br /&gt;
::* Links two records together&lt;br /&gt;
::* Fields with lookups (FlexScreen Lookup) create links to related record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hover mouse to see number of related records [[File:RelatedRecordsHover.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::** The first number is the record currently displayed in the field and the second number is the total number of related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::** To add or remove relationships you must be in Edit mode.[[File:AddRemove.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::*** + allows for adding additional related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::*** - = removes relationship of displayed related record&lt;br /&gt;
::** Double-clicking a related record moves user to that record information&lt;br /&gt;
::** Note:  IMPORTANT to never type over information; you will delete information or change that record in the database (there is no Undo)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Screens ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - displays the Epiphany application with your Company Logo.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Screens:Person|Person]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all companies in your database&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::* Main – company demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::* Addresses – displays all addresses for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Dealer/Distributor – displays dealers and distributors related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AR History – displays accounts receivable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP History – displays accounts payable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Inv History – displays invoice history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Open Orders – displays open orders for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Opportunities – displays status of sales opportunities for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contracts – displays all contracts related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Authorizations – displays authorizations for licensing/subscriptions or other items to track for billing back to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Tasks – displays any tasks in the system related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Activity – displays all contact activity received for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Customer Assets – tracks assets sold to customer&lt;br /&gt;
::* Acct Defaults – displays default billing information and expense account for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Credit Card -- stores credit card information for billing&lt;br /&gt;
::* Affiliations – tracks parent companies and subsidiary companies&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Top Section(Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Order (Inventory Orders) – shortcut to create a new order (auto-fills Ordered By and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create PO (Customer Purchase Orders) – shortcut to create a new purchase order (auto-fills Order From and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sort Name vs. Company Name – Sort Name auto-fills when Company Name field is entered; can be edited to sort differently for searching records&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – link pertinent categories to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Vend# – displays vendor number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cust# – displays customer number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* EIN – displays Employee Identification Number or Federal Tax ID number to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Company Information (Main Tab) – displays address related to company record &lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Contacts (Main Tab) – displays contacts related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
:5.	Logo (Main Tab) – import company’s logo&lt;br /&gt;
:6.	Bottom Section (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Internal contacts managing, services, etc. the related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Num Employees – for recording employee size of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Annual Revenue – for recording annual revenue of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:7. Comment (Main Tab) – displays any comments pertinent to related company record that would not be entered as a note&lt;br /&gt;
:8. Acct Password – displays password associated with related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:9. Print Label (Main Tab) – print an address label to compatible printer&lt;br /&gt;
:10. Filtered (Main Tab) – prints address labels for all records when company records are filtered&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Notes (Main Tab) – add public or private notes and comments to related record&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Addresses Expanded Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all the addresses in the system&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Top Section&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 1 – first line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 2 – second line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* City, ST ZIP – City, State (abbreviated), and Zip code (allows for +4 and foreign)&lt;br /&gt;
::* County – County city is located&lt;br /&gt;
::* Country – default is USA&lt;br /&gt;
::* Map – provide a URL to a map if desired&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Desc – description of address if needed (i.e. Warehouse vs. Office)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Latitude – when an address does not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Longitude – used when an address not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Phone Number &amp;amp; Phone Desc – displays phone for that address (used when multiple addresses are used that have different phone numbers for each location)&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP Location – used for accounts payable invoices/purchase orders&lt;br /&gt;
::* Do not subscribe – opt-out of receiving certain information&lt;br /&gt;
::* Special Info – special notes specific to this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Add Task Button – creates a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Contract Button – creates a new contract&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task History – displays the task history&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Company – displays company for this specific address record (i.e. rental or leased property)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Person – displays contact at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Company – displays company that owns property at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Person – displays contact name of owning company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Tax Key – displays sales tax key to use for this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contract – displays any contracts related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Zone Information – displays zone information related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Notes – add public or private notes and comments to related address&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tasks Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all tasks in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Task View&lt;br /&gt;
::* Active – displays Active tasks only&lt;br /&gt;
::* Completed – displays completed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cancelled – displays cancelled tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Projects – displays all project tasks in system&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hide Tasks with Uncompleted Prerequisites&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Future Tasks – displays tasks with due date in the future&lt;br /&gt;
::* Go To Task# - enter specific task number into text box to open and display a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Print – prints tasks displayed on screen in a report format&lt;br /&gt;
::* Graph – visual graphic of new tasks vs. closed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filtered – displays graph based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Assigned To – displays tasks assigned to criteria selected below&lt;br /&gt;
::* Requested By – displays tasks by person requesting task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Coordinator – displays tasks by Task Coordinator&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Filter – displays data for a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – displays tasks by related category&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Type – displays tasks by related task type&lt;br /&gt;
::* Person – displays tasks by specific person&lt;br /&gt;
::* Department – displays tasks by department&lt;br /&gt;
::* Company – displays tasks by specific company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Mine – displays tasks for user currently logged in&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show All – shows all tasks for your company&lt;br /&gt;
::* New Task – allows for entry of a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting – click on column header(s) to sort in ascending or descending order&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expand [[File:Expand.png]] – show more records/data&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	Activity View – displays all recorded activity for your organization and allows for easy creation of new activity records&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Appointment View – displays appointments scheduled&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date range –display by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Worklog View – displays logged hours based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date Range – displays by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Project View – displays project timelines&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Mileage Log – displays mileage&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1248</id>
		<title>Manual:Basics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Basics&amp;diff=1248"/>
		<updated>2024-04-11T20:31:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* File:ActiveRecords.png Active Records */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen ==&lt;br /&gt;
Flex Screens are the standard Epiphany data entry screens.  They all have the same layout and same features to make your user experience more consistent.  In addition to the data displayed on the screen, there are several design layouts listed below that are common to all Flex Screens.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Title Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The title bar is across the top of the window, and displays the name of the screen you are on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
: The menu bar is directly below the title bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: The First option is always Applications; provides access to standard screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Menus will differ:&lt;br /&gt;
:*On how Epiphany was configured for your organization,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Individual user rights, and on&lt;br /&gt;
:*What application or menu item you’re in&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shortcut Keys – Main Application (differs by Menu, but same concept). Example:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A = Applications (continue to hold Alt and Press A again...)&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x2) = AR&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+A (x3) = AP&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+T = Tables&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+I = Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+G = General Ledger&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+P = Payroll&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+U = Utilities&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+S = Setup&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+R = Reports&lt;br /&gt;
:*Alt+H = Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:For Submenus – Use first letter of Menu Item; if multiples of same beginning letter, press that letter multiple times to move through the menu items beginning with that letter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
: The toolbar is directly below the menu bar, and contains action icons.  Hovering over those icons will display a short description of the function. Icons appear white when available and grayed out when not available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#far:arrow-circle-left}} Back&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Goes back to previous screen&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:chevron-circle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-left}}  {{#fas:angle-right}} {{#fas:chevron-circle-right}} Navigation Buttons&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: The outer arrows in a circle move to the first and last records of a table, the white inner arrows advance forward or backward one record&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddDeleteEdit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;{{#fas:fa-plus}} Add&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Immediately adds a new record; complete fields otherwise there will be a blank record in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit; this will remove the newly added record if it has not been saved yet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Delete&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be removed or merged with an existing record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Yes to delete currently displayed record and merge with an existing record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click No to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MergeDeletedRecordDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: Upon clicking Yes to merge with another record and selecting the record to merge with, confirm deletion and merge, then click Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMergeDeleteRecordsDialogBox.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
: (Clicking No from this screen only deletes the record and does not merge the record with another record)&lt;br /&gt;
: Click no to delete the record without merging with another record&lt;br /&gt;
: Click Cancel to cancel the deletion&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Edit&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows a record to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
: [[File:CancelEdit.png]] The Edit button changes to Cancel edit and allows any changes to be canceled if the changes have not been saved already.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RefreshSearch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Refresh&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows the record to be refreshed to see the most current view of the screen you are currently on.  Generally used when someone is editing the record you are currently viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows for lookup of records&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Print.png]] Print&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Print is active on screens that have a standard report defined.  The standard print dialog box will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Print Preview&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: Found to the right of the Print button; prints the report to screen first for review prior to printing.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ActiveRecords.png]] Active Records&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: By default shows only active records...  This is a toggle button and can toggle to show all records or only Active Records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Filter.png]] Filter&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows the records to be filtered by any standard field on the current screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:FilterPresets.png]] Filter Presets&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: to the right of the Filter icon allows the use of saved Filters or removes the current filter to display all records.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:CaptureImage.png]] Capture Image&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows for document scanning with an attached compatible scanner/capture device.  Document is scanned, added to the Documents Table and a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document scanned.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:AttachFile.png]] Attach File&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows for a file to be selected from a location on your computer (network drive, local drive, etc.) and attached to the current record.  Again, the document is added to the Documents Table, a relationship is automatically created between the current record and the document/file attached.  Note:  this creates a copy of the file and does not remove the file from its original location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OtherActions.png]] Other Actions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;==== &lt;br /&gt;
: allows access to several other actions available if definitions have been created.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Notifications.png]] Notifications&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: When green, there are unviewed notifications for the user logged in (not specific to the current record on the screen).  Notifications are generated by Document Flow Rules created in the system to notify users when a record has been added, changed, or a note added to a record related to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Object Screen.png]] Object Screen&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: shows each screen related to the object (screen) a user is currently viewing.  This allows a user to quickly switch between related screens and only if user has access to the screen(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchPin.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Search.png]] Global Search&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows a user to do a global search. The Search Results returned indicate which tables the string of data appears.&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:Gray&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Pin.png]] Pin&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
: allows a user to pin a screen without opening another instance of Epiphany. The pinned screen will stay open as you open/navigate to other screens. It will stay open until either the pinned screen is closed or the user exits Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Relationships Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Allows access to other records related to the current record on the screen.  Item will be bold white when there are related items and grayed out when there are no related objects attached.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RelationshipsBar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:;Relationships&lt;br /&gt;
:: shows all records related to the current record displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Notes&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the capability to attach notes as well as view existing notes related to a record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Documents&lt;br /&gt;
::allows the capability to view all documents related to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
:;Approvals&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows for reviewing and/or signing electronic documents.  Used anytime an electronic signature needs to be captured.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Tasks&lt;br /&gt;
:: displays any active Tasks related to the selected record.&lt;br /&gt;
:;History&lt;br /&gt;
:: allows the user to view the history of changes made to the current record.  &lt;br /&gt;
::; Database Change History Grid&lt;br /&gt;
::: displays the date/time stamp along with the user that performed any adds, changes and/or deletes to the records being viewed, the new value and the relationship type along with the Screen the action was performed from.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Help&lt;br /&gt;
::provides a brief description of the screen, details and technical data of a specific field. The current screen name is displayed under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; section. Hovering over a field will display help information under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Detail&#039;&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Information Bar===&lt;br /&gt;
: Contains information about your Epiphany session and the record currently displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:InformationBar.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:; Current User (1)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the user currently logged into Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Shortcuts (2)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Toggles shortcuts (on and off) to commonly used screens.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Server or Computer Name (3)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the server or the computer currently being used to access Epiphany&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record ID (4)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the internal unique ID of the record currently displayed&lt;br /&gt;
:; Record Count (5)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the number of records in the current Filter or Table of records&lt;br /&gt;
:; Unfiltered (6)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays number of filtered records when a filter is in place (when filtered this will toggle to &#039;&#039;&#039;FILTERED SCREEN&#039;&#039;&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
:; No Reason (7)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows for entering a reason changes are being made to a record and records the reason within its history records. Generally, no longer used as Notes are now used.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Notification (8)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays current notifications in system for current user to take action on.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Widgets (9)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays Widget control to create shortcuts to screens and widgets.&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Shortcuts to screens are easily created&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Be on the screen you want to create a shortcut to&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Go into Widget mode&lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click [[File:AddShortcut.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
::::*Click Yes&lt;br /&gt;
:; Theme (10)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows user to change the color scheme and landing screen.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Zoom (11)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Allows the user to change the zoom percentage of Epiphany.&lt;br /&gt;
:; Database Name (12)&lt;br /&gt;
:: Displays the name of the database you are currently accessing.  If you have access to more than one Epiphany database, you can double-click this field to switch to another database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Flex Screen Lookup ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Tool Bar [[File:LookupToolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Text field - standard search&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Filter.png]] = filter on selected search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Select Record -- opens record selected/highlighted&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:ActiveRecords.png]] = active records (toggle to show both Active &amp;amp; Inactive records)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AdvancedSearch.png]] = E-MC2 allows for advanced search (search on any portion of selected field)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:RecordID.png]] = displays unique Record ID&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:SearchByCategory.png]] = search by category then by record by expanding category&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Refresh.png]] = refreshes records displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Clear.png]]  = closes Flex Screen Lookup without selecting record&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Favorites.png]] = displays records you have added to your Favorites list 	&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:AddNewRecord.png]] = allows user to add the text in search field box as a new record in the database (must have rights to “add on fly”)&lt;br /&gt;
::* [[File:Ascending.png]] and [[File:Descending.png]] = toggles sort order between Ascending/Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Normal behavior&lt;br /&gt;
::* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
::** Default order of columns displayed&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expanding [[File:Expand.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
::** Select Column to sort on&lt;br /&gt;
::** Ascending&lt;br /&gt;
::** Descending&lt;br /&gt;
:; Additional behavior&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickColumnHeader.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Column Header in a grid (vs. Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Sorting&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left-click Column Header Name to sort&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::::* Ascending/descending Toggle [[File:Ascending.png]] or [[File:Descending.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Scroll Set / Clear &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Left to right scrolling of columns&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::*  Clears on close&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickRecord.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click on Record in a grid (vs. Column Header) &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Copy / Paste&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Moves records in a grid (sets priority only for categorized items)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites (Add/remove) – adds record to Favorites list and displays on default Lookup screen (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Colors – color code records in a grid (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[File:RightClickTableProperties.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::* Right-click Table Properties [[File:Expand2.png]] or [[File:Expand.png]]   &lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show… (temporary; doesn’t save in layout) &lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* IDs&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Relationship Types&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::::::::* Priorities&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Favorites Mode – displays only records added as a Favorite (*)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Row Lines – will show horizontal grid lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Show Column Lines – will show vertical grid lines (user preference)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout (column order &amp;amp; width; per user; does not change default lookup field)&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Save Layout Filters&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Default Layout – reset to default layout&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Export to File&lt;br /&gt;
::::::::::::::* Graph&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relationships ==&lt;br /&gt;
:; Navigating and Understanding&lt;br /&gt;
::* Links two records together&lt;br /&gt;
::* Fields with lookups (FlexScreen Lookup) create links to related record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hover mouse to see number of related records [[File:RelatedRecordsHover.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::** The first number is the record currently displayed in the field and the second number is the total number of related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::** To add or remove relationships you must be in Edit mode.[[File:AddRemove.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
::*** + allows for adding additional related records of the same type&lt;br /&gt;
::*** - = removes relationship of displayed related record&lt;br /&gt;
::** Double-clicking a related record moves user to that record information&lt;br /&gt;
::** Note:  IMPORTANT to never type over information; you will delete information or change that record in the database (there is no Undo)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Screens ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - displays the Epiphany application with your Company Logo.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Screens:Person|Person]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all companies in your database&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::* Main – company demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::* Addresses – displays all addresses for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Dealer/Distributor – displays dealers and distributors related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AR History – displays accounts receivable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP History – displays accounts payable history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Inv History – displays invoice history for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Open Orders – displays open orders for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Opportunities – displays status of sales opportunities for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contracts – displays all contracts related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Authorizations – displays authorizations for licensing/subscriptions or other items to track for billing back to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Tasks – displays any tasks in the system related to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Activity – displays all contact activity received for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Customer Assets – tracks assets sold to customer&lt;br /&gt;
::* Acct Defaults – displays default billing information and expense account for related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Credit Card -- stores credit card information for billing&lt;br /&gt;
::* Affiliations – tracks parent companies and subsidiary companies&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Top Section(Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Order (Inventory Orders) – shortcut to create a new order (auto-fills Ordered By and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create PO (Customer Purchase Orders) – shortcut to create a new purchase order (auto-fills Order From and Ship To information, if stored in selected company record)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sort Name vs. Company Name – Sort Name auto-fills when Company Name field is entered; can be edited to sort differently for searching records&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – link pertinent categories to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Vend# – displays vendor number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cust# – displays customer number assigned to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* EIN – displays Employee Identification Number or Federal Tax ID number to related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Company Information (Main Tab) – displays address related to company record &lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Contacts (Main Tab) – displays contacts related to company record&lt;br /&gt;
:5.	Logo (Main Tab) – import company’s logo&lt;br /&gt;
:6.	Bottom Section (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Internal contacts managing, services, etc. the related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Num Employees – for recording employee size of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
::* Annual Revenue – for recording annual revenue of related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:7. Comment (Main Tab) – displays any comments pertinent to related company record that would not be entered as a note&lt;br /&gt;
:8. Acct Password – displays password associated with related company record&lt;br /&gt;
:9. Print Label (Main Tab) – print an address label to compatible printer&lt;br /&gt;
:10. Filtered (Main Tab) – prints address labels for all records when company records are filtered&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Notes (Main Tab) – add public or private notes and comments to related record&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Addresses Expanded Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all the addresses in the system&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Top Section&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 1 – first line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Line 2 – second line of an address&lt;br /&gt;
::* City, ST ZIP – City, State (abbreviated), and Zip code (allows for +4 and foreign)&lt;br /&gt;
::* County – County city is located&lt;br /&gt;
::* Country – default is USA&lt;br /&gt;
::* Map – provide a URL to a map if desired&lt;br /&gt;
::* Address Desc – description of address if needed (i.e. Warehouse vs. Office)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Latitude – when an address does not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Longitude – used when an address not yet exist&lt;br /&gt;
::* Phone Number &amp;amp; Phone Desc – displays phone for that address (used when multiple addresses are used that have different phone numbers for each location)&lt;br /&gt;
::* AP Location – used for accounts payable invoices/purchase orders&lt;br /&gt;
::* Do not subscribe – opt-out of receiving certain information&lt;br /&gt;
::* Special Info – special notes specific to this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Add Task Button – creates a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Create Contract Button – creates a new contract&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task History – displays the task history&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Company – displays company for this specific address record (i.e. rental or leased property)&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contact Person – displays contact at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Company – displays company that owns property at that address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Owning Person – displays contact name of owning company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sales Tax Key – displays sales tax key to use for this address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Contract – displays any contracts related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Zone Information – displays zone information related to the address&lt;br /&gt;
::* Notes – add public or private notes and comments to related address&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tasks Screen&#039;&#039;&#039; - consists of all tasks in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Task View&lt;br /&gt;
::* Active – displays Active tasks only&lt;br /&gt;
::* Completed – displays completed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Cancelled – displays cancelled tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Projects – displays all project tasks in system&lt;br /&gt;
::* Hide Tasks with Uncompleted Prerequisites&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Future Tasks – displays tasks with due date in the future&lt;br /&gt;
::* Go To Task# - enter specific task number into text box to open and display a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Print – prints tasks displayed on screen in a report format&lt;br /&gt;
::* Graph – visual graphic of new tasks vs. closed tasks&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filtered – displays graph based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Assigned To – displays tasks assigned to criteria selected below&lt;br /&gt;
::* Requested By – displays tasks by person requesting task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Coordinator – displays tasks by Task Coordinator&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Filter – displays data for a specific task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Category – displays tasks by related category&lt;br /&gt;
::* Task Type – displays tasks by related task type&lt;br /&gt;
::* Person – displays tasks by specific person&lt;br /&gt;
::* Department – displays tasks by department&lt;br /&gt;
::* Company – displays tasks by specific company&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show Mine – displays tasks for user currently logged in&lt;br /&gt;
::* Show All – shows all tasks for your company&lt;br /&gt;
::* New Task – allows for entry of a new task&lt;br /&gt;
::* Sorting – click on column header(s) to sort in ascending or descending order&lt;br /&gt;
::* Expand [[File:Expand.png]] – show more records/data&lt;br /&gt;
:2.	Activity View – displays all recorded activity for your organization and allows for easy creation of new activity records&lt;br /&gt;
:3.	Appointment View – displays appointments scheduled&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date range –display by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:4.	Worklog View – displays logged hours based on filtered criteria&lt;br /&gt;
::* Date Range – displays by day, week or month&lt;br /&gt;
::* Filters – filtered by Company, Person, Task or Department&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Project View – displays project timelines&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Mileage Log – displays mileage&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1247</id>
		<title>Manual:Accounts Receivable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Accounts_Receivable&amp;diff=1247"/>
		<updated>2024-04-11T20:30:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Sales Order */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
=Accounts Receivable=&lt;br /&gt;
===Sales Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Order / Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Order From / Ship To (Ship To defaults to Ordered By, but can be edited)&lt;br /&gt;
#Cust PO – enter customer PO if they have one&lt;br /&gt;
#Terms – enter terms of payment (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
#SalesPerson – enter salesperson&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Via – enter carrier if specified&lt;br /&gt;
#Rush – check if a rush order&lt;br /&gt;
#Due Date – enter date needed if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
#Ship Date – displays ship date&lt;br /&gt;
#Purchase Order Lines – enter the purchase order line items and update as needed&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter credit card information, if any or check C.O.D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create AR Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – click to create invoice for displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create PO&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates a purchase order for vendor&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Label&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates shipping label&lt;br /&gt;
:*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create Pick List&#039;&#039;&#039; – creates pick list that can be printed to pick order for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy An Order&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to the order to copy&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Other Actions icon (ellipses) on the Toolbar and select Copy Record&lt;br /&gt;
#Click OK on the pop-up message to see the newly copied order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; (Inventory / Inventory Order / Open Orders)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Displays list and status of open orders&lt;br /&gt;
:**Green = in stock&lt;br /&gt;
:**Yellow = partial&lt;br /&gt;
:**Red = Not received into inventory &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To Print Copy of Order(s):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select orders using Ctrl+left mouse click on the record selection square[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Selected Orders&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AR_Print_Selected_Orders.PNG]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check either box that applies and then click OK&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. After clicking OK, you will then see the ReportPreview, which you can then either save or print.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inventory Receipt===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Inventory / Inventory Receipt List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Fill out Order By section. Ship To section will auto-populate. Change Ship To address if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:2. If needed, enter the following:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Enter Cust PO&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Enter Ship Via&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Enter Sales Person&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Enter Category&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Enter Location&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Enter Code&lt;br /&gt;
:4. Enter Qty to Pick (if pulling items, Enter Actual Qty Pulled)&lt;br /&gt;
:5. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:6. Enter special instructions, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
-If pulling items, you can create an AR Invoice from those items:&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Select Create AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Most boxes will auto-populate&lt;br /&gt;
:3. If necessary, put a comment on the invoice in the Comments box.&lt;br /&gt;
:4. The invoice is now created. From there, you have the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
::a. &#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::b. &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::c. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::d. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::f. &#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::g. &#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::h. &#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::i. &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
The following are also options on the Inventory Shipment/Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Create ASN (Advanced Ship Notice)&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Packing List. This will let you save or print a packing list.&lt;br /&gt;
:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Invoice Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Create RMA&#039;&#039;&#039; - for returns a new order is created with a negative quantity to put item back into inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Single Print&#039;&#039;&#039; – Reprints invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print Labels&#039;&#039;&#039; – shipping labels&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Quote&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking of quote to invoice (used rarely)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – allows for manually linking order to invoice&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Print ProForma&#039;&#039;&#039; – Similar to a packing slip (used for International Shipments)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Packing List&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints packing slip for shipment&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Back Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; – prints list of back orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;&#039;Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – send invoice as an email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enter Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Click Add&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Enter Bill To company&lt;br /&gt;
::*Ship to will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter Customer PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter Location, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Enter SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Enter Ship Via, if preference&lt;br /&gt;
::7. Ship Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::8. Term will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::9. Due Date will auto-populate, update if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::10. Enter AR Invoice Lines&lt;br /&gt;
:::a. Select Code&lt;br /&gt;
:::b. Enter Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
:::c. Enter Part Number&lt;br /&gt;
:::d. Enter Price (if different from default)&lt;br /&gt;
:::e. Tab through Total&lt;br /&gt;
:::f. If Tax Exempt, uncheck Tax box&lt;br /&gt;
:::g. Enter Comment if needed&lt;br /&gt;
:::h. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
::11. Add comment in the comments section if necessary&lt;br /&gt;
::12. Fill out credit card #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email AR Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  Company&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click the Addresses Tab&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Complete the information in the Send Email area&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; – check if invoice should be emailed to customer&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email address invoice should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
:::• &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – enter email payment confirmation should be sent to&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sned invoice via Email&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email a Single Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Search and select the Invoice you want to email&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click[[File:Send_Email.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::3. A popup email form will appear with the Invoice attached as a .PDF&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Enter “To” Email address&lt;br /&gt;
::5. Attach additional files if desired by clicking “Attach” and navigating to the file&lt;br /&gt;
::6. Click Send&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email Multiple Invoices===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Email Invoice Utility&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note:  One-time setup per customer is required (see Invoice Email Setup above)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Run the Email Invoice Utility&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Complete the box with the correct criteria and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
:::• This will send the corresponding invoice(s) to all the companies that fit the criteria&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:AR_Email_Invoice_Utility.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::• Upon clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; the emails are sent, and a report is generated showing all the invoices that were sent.  If any errors occur, make the necessary corrections to the email address and use the single email method above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If there are several invoices for a company, invoices will be combined into one .PDF file and one email will be sent to the company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pay AR Invoice===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Pay AR Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select Company&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Select invoice(s) to apply payment to&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on[[File:RecordSelection.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If amount is less than invoice amount, highlight row and enter Amount Paid and Amount Credited, and then tab through the row&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Amount to Pay will auto-calculate based on invoices selected&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Check, select Check&lt;br /&gt;
:::**Enter Check No. in &#039;&#039;&#039;Check / Ref #&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*If Credit Card, select Credit Card&lt;br /&gt;
:::**A dialog box will appear for entry of credit card information&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Other Payments Types may be available:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:AR_Payment_Types.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Payment History===&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Location: AR / Payment History&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows all payments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create Deposit===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Shows list of all checks received&lt;br /&gt;
::1. Select records for the individual deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
::2. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
::3. Select Receipts for this Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*To select multiple Invoices use Ctrl+left mouse click on&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Verify Total at bottom&lt;br /&gt;
::4. Click Create Deposit&lt;br /&gt;
:::*The amount of deposit will match the amount on deposit slip provided to your bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*Open Orders&lt;br /&gt;
::*Aging Report – lists of everyone owing money&lt;br /&gt;
::*Statement – list of all invoices with amounts credited and what is still due&lt;br /&gt;
::*Sales Tax Return – sales tax on total gross sales report&lt;br /&gt;
::**See insight reporting / Accounts Receivable for all available AR reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create an Invoice from an Existing Quote or Order===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039;  AR / Invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::1.	To Select an existing Quote, click [[File:Select_Quote.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::2.	To select an existing Order, click [[File:Select Order.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Information will auto-populate from existing Quote or Order and fields can be updated as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Verify the following:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::a. Date (typically the date of Sale)&lt;br /&gt;
::b. Customer Name (if Company name does not exist, click Add Record)&lt;br /&gt;
::c. Person (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
::d. Bill To and Ship To Addresses will automatically populate.  If different, remove displayed address by clicking on – sign and then click on + sign to choose existing address from Address Table (or add new if needed)&lt;br /&gt;
::e. Customer’s PO number, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::f. SalesPerson, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::g. Code (usually P1 for Inventory Sales or S1 for Service)&lt;br /&gt;
::h. Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
::i. Part Desc will auto-populates from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::j. Line Desc will auto-populate from the Inventory Table&lt;br /&gt;
::k. Unit of product being sold (i.e. each, case, bottle, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
::l. Price (Unit) you are charging customer&lt;br /&gt;
::m. Price will auto-calculate; Tab through fields&lt;br /&gt;
::n. If item is nontaxable, tab to  and uncheck this box&lt;br /&gt;
::o. Comments pertaining to this invoice, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
::p. Click Save&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory&amp;diff=1246</id>
		<title>Screens:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory&amp;diff=1246"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T21:17:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Tabs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
[https://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory-Assembly Inventory - Assembly]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[https://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory-Production_Process Inventory - Production Process]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Buttons==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory-Production_Process&amp;diff=1245</id>
		<title>Screens:Inventory-Production Process</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory-Production_Process&amp;diff=1245"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T21:14:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: Created page with &amp;quot;Category:Inventory ==Tabs== ==Buttons==&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
==Buttons==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1244</id>
		<title>Manual:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1244"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T21:10:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
Config screens here (hyperlinks to Screens).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Screens&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reports==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inventory==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Main&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – main inventory item demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Assembly&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – parts assembly for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Process&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays operations attached to inventory record&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Product Builder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product builder for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitutions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product substitutions allowed for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Revisions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – records revisions to inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Serial Entry&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays serial numbers for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Images&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays/stores images for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – In-Stock Breakdown (different warehouse/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;POS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Point-of-Sale information for Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inv Tran History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays history for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Current Activity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays open orders and open pick lists containing inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Other History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays production run history&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Create Adj&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used when inventory is off after physical count&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Move&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (Location of inventory breakdown at different warehouses/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used to move inventory from one location to another&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Recalculate Prices&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Adjusts the price levels based on changes in markup, discount, or last cost&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Update Orders&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Updates existing orders in system if prices are recalculated&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Prints barcode from UPC field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Entry ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Add&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (this description will appear on Invoices, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Long Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if desired&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if categories are utilized&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Manufacturer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Drawing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if using blueprints&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rev&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays current revision from Revisions Tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GL Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The GL Group(s) that an invoice for this part will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Dimensions&lt;br /&gt;
::*Weight&lt;br /&gt;
::*Length&lt;br /&gt;
::*Width&lt;br /&gt;
::*Height&lt;br /&gt;
:12. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically adjusted when receiving in parts and fulfilling customer orders.&lt;br /&gt;
:13. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Desc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:14. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Minimum Stock&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Quantity to always be in stock (for purposes of reordering).&lt;br /&gt;
:15. Displays &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where parts are stocked&lt;br /&gt;
:16. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ctry of Origin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where the part came from&lt;br /&gt;
:17. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tariff Code&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The code that is used for International Sales codes from the United States International Trade Commission. Refer to the Harmonized Tariff Schedule of the United States for this information.&lt;br /&gt;
:18. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Reserve Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Specifies the quantity of this part that should always be in stock. For example, these parts may be required for production run purposes and should not be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
:19. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lead Days&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Indicates the number of days needed to order and receive the part from the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
:20. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cubic Feet&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:21. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gauge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:22. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Count Per Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The amount of individual parts per unit. For example, one unit may be a pallet of 15 individual parts, making the count per unit 15.&lt;br /&gt;
:23. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Color&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of part, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:24. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inventory Location Breakdown&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantity in stock at each location.&lt;br /&gt;
:25. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock by Lot/Serial#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantities in stock by serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
:26. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Price/Costs&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Retail Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is entered here. Price Levels can be set at different markups and discounts (applied from the last cost of the unit).&lt;br /&gt;
:27. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Extra Shipping&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be applied to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
:28. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sales Price/Start Date/End Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the sale price of the unit and when the sale starts and ends.&lt;br /&gt;
:29. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity Pricing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows minimum quantity of part to be purchased or special quantity pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
:30. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Suppliers/Customers Part#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows the different suppliers for the part, their part number, and minimum order quantity, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
:31. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Markup Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is applied if there is special pricing based on percentage. When a Markup Group is applied to a customer, the percentages are automatically calculated on customer orders as well as any quantity pricing discounts or minimum quantity requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
:32. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cost Change Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; when checked will auto-update (&amp;quot;recalc inventory item&amp;quot;) prices for the given inventory item when any inventory posting happens where the cost is changed.&lt;br /&gt;
:33. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last Cost Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is a stored value that displays the invoice date/time stamp of the last time the cost was updated (last inventory posting where cost was changed). See Field Help in Epiphany for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Transaction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically fulfilled when shipment or receipt is generated&lt;br /&gt;
::*Manual entry can be done when adjusting inventory manually&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quote ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Quote&lt;br /&gt;
:Similar to entering an order, but starts as a quote&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quote to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if different from Quote to&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship Via&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if preference&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customer PO&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SalesPerson&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter items in Quote Lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::a. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::b. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::c. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and tab through&lt;br /&gt;
::::d. If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax Exempt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, uncheck box&lt;br /&gt;
::::e. Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create an Invoice – create invoice from current displayed quote&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create Order – create an order from currently displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
::*Copy Quote – copy quote to start a new quote with same information&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick List ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:From the Order Screen the pick list is created&lt;br /&gt;
:#Search to find specific Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Print Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Once items are physically picked, click Create AR Invoice(button)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Price List Report&lt;br /&gt;
:* Inventory Reorder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Physical Inventory Worksheet&lt;br /&gt;
:* See Insight Reporting for all available Inventory reports&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1243</id>
		<title>Manual:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1243"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T21:09:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
Config screens here (hyperlinks to Screens).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Screens&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reports==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inventory==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Main&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – main inventory item demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Assembly&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – parts assembly for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Process&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays operations attached to inventory record&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Product Builder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product builder for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitutions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product substitutions allowed for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Revisions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – records revisions to inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Serial Entry&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays serial numbers for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Images&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays/stores images for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – In-Stock Breakdown (different warehouse/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;POS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Point-of-Sale information for Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inv Tran History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays history for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Current Activity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays open orders and open pick lists containing inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Other History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays production run history&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Create Adj&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used when inventory is off after physical count&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Move&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (Location of inventory breakdown at different warehouses/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used to move inventory from one location to another&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Recalculate Prices&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Adjusts the price levels based on changes in markup, discount, or last cost&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Update Orders&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Updates existing orders in system if prices are recalculated&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Prints barcode from UPC field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Entry ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Add&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (this description will appear on Invoices, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Long Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if desired&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if categories are utilized&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Manufacturer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Drawing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if using blueprints&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rev&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays current revision from Revisions Tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GL Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The GL Group(s) that an invoice for this part will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Dimensions&lt;br /&gt;
::*Weight&lt;br /&gt;
::*Length&lt;br /&gt;
::*Width&lt;br /&gt;
::*Height&lt;br /&gt;
:12. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically adjusted when receiving in parts and fulfilling customer orders.&lt;br /&gt;
:13. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Desc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:14. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Minimum Stock&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Quantity to always be in stock (for purposes of reordering).&lt;br /&gt;
:15. Displays &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where parts are stocked&lt;br /&gt;
:16. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ctry of Origin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where the part came from&lt;br /&gt;
:17. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tariff Code&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The code that is used for International Sales codes from the United States International Trade Commission. Refer to the Harmonized Tariff Schedule of the United States for this information.&lt;br /&gt;
:18. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Reserve Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Specifies the quantity of this part that should always be in stock. For example, these parts may be required for production run purposes and should not be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
:19. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lead Days&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Indicates the number of days needed to order and receive the part from the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
:20. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cubic Feet&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:21. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gauge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:22. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Count Per Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The amount of individual parts per unit. For example, one unit may be a pallet of 15 individual parts, making the count per unit 15.&lt;br /&gt;
:23. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Color&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of part, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:24. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inventory Location Breakdown&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantity in stock at each location.&lt;br /&gt;
:25. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock by Lot/Serial#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantities in stock by serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
:26. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Price/Costs&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Retail Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is entered here. Price Levels can be set at different markups and discounts (applied from the last cost of the unit).&lt;br /&gt;
:27. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Extra Shipping&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be applied to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
:28. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sales Price/Start Date/End Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the sale price of the unit and when the sale starts and ends.&lt;br /&gt;
:29. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity Pricing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows minimum quantity of part to be purchased or special quantity pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
:30. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Suppliers/Customers Part#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows the different suppliers for the part, their part number, and minimum order quantity, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
:31. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Markup Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is applied if there is special pricing based on percentage. When a Markup Group is applied to a customer, the percentages are automatically calculated on customer orders as well as any quantity pricing discounts or minimum quantity requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
:32. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cost Change Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; when checked will auto-update (&amp;quot;recalc inventory item&amp;quot;) prices for the given inventory item when any inventory posting happens where the cost is changed.&lt;br /&gt;
:33. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last Cost Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is a stored value that displays the invoice date/time stamp of the last time the cost was updated (last inventory posting where cost was changed). See Field Help in Epiphany for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Transaction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically fulfilled when shipment or receipt is generated&lt;br /&gt;
::*Manual entry can be done when adjusting inventory manually&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quote ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Quote&lt;br /&gt;
:Similar to entering an order, but starts as a quote&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quote to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if different from Quote to&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship Via&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if preference&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customer PO&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SalesPerson&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter items in Quote Lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::a. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::b. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::c. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and tab through&lt;br /&gt;
::::d. If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax Exempt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, uncheck box&lt;br /&gt;
::::e. Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create an Invoice – create invoice from current displayed quote&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create Order – create an order from currently displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
::*Copy Quote – copy quote to start a new quote with same information&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick List ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:From the Order Screen the pick list is created&lt;br /&gt;
:#Search to find specific Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Print Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Once items are physically picked, click Create AR Invoice(button)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Price List Report&lt;br /&gt;
:* Inventory Reorder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Physical Inventory Worksheet&lt;br /&gt;
:* See Insight Reporting for all available Inventory reports&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1242</id>
		<title>Manual:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1242"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T21:08:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Screens */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
Config screens here (hyperlinks to Screens).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reports==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inventory==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Main&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – main inventory item demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Assembly&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – parts assembly for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Process&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays operations attached to inventory record&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Product Builder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product builder for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitutions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product substitutions allowed for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Revisions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – records revisions to inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Serial Entry&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays serial numbers for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Images&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays/stores images for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – In-Stock Breakdown (different warehouse/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;POS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Point-of-Sale information for Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inv Tran History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays history for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Current Activity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays open orders and open pick lists containing inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Other History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays production run history&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Create Adj&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used when inventory is off after physical count&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Move&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (Location of inventory breakdown at different warehouses/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used to move inventory from one location to another&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Recalculate Prices&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Adjusts the price levels based on changes in markup, discount, or last cost&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Update Orders&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Updates existing orders in system if prices are recalculated&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Prints barcode from UPC field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Entry ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Add&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (this description will appear on Invoices, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Long Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if desired&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if categories are utilized&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Manufacturer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Drawing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if using blueprints&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rev&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays current revision from Revisions Tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GL Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The GL Group(s) that an invoice for this part will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Dimensions&lt;br /&gt;
::*Weight&lt;br /&gt;
::*Length&lt;br /&gt;
::*Width&lt;br /&gt;
::*Height&lt;br /&gt;
:12. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically adjusted when receiving in parts and fulfilling customer orders.&lt;br /&gt;
:13. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Desc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:14. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Minimum Stock&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Quantity to always be in stock (for purposes of reordering).&lt;br /&gt;
:15. Displays &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where parts are stocked&lt;br /&gt;
:16. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ctry of Origin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where the part came from&lt;br /&gt;
:17. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tariff Code&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The code that is used for International Sales codes from the United States International Trade Commission. Refer to the Harmonized Tariff Schedule of the United States for this information.&lt;br /&gt;
:18. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Reserve Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Specifies the quantity of this part that should always be in stock. For example, these parts may be required for production run purposes and should not be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
:19. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lead Days&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Indicates the number of days needed to order and receive the part from the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
:20. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cubic Feet&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:21. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gauge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:22. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Count Per Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The amount of individual parts per unit. For example, one unit may be a pallet of 15 individual parts, making the count per unit 15.&lt;br /&gt;
:23. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Color&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of part, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:24. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inventory Location Breakdown&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantity in stock at each location.&lt;br /&gt;
:25. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock by Lot/Serial#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantities in stock by serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
:26. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Price/Costs&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Retail Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is entered here. Price Levels can be set at different markups and discounts (applied from the last cost of the unit).&lt;br /&gt;
:27. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Extra Shipping&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be applied to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
:28. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sales Price/Start Date/End Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the sale price of the unit and when the sale starts and ends.&lt;br /&gt;
:29. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity Pricing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows minimum quantity of part to be purchased or special quantity pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
:30. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Suppliers/Customers Part#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows the different suppliers for the part, their part number, and minimum order quantity, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
:31. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Markup Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is applied if there is special pricing based on percentage. When a Markup Group is applied to a customer, the percentages are automatically calculated on customer orders as well as any quantity pricing discounts or minimum quantity requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
:32. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cost Change Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; when checked will auto-update (&amp;quot;recalc inventory item&amp;quot;) prices for the given inventory item when any inventory posting happens where the cost is changed.&lt;br /&gt;
:33. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last Cost Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is a stored value that displays the invoice date/time stamp of the last time the cost was updated (last inventory posting where cost was changed). See Field Help in Epiphany for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Transaction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically fulfilled when shipment or receipt is generated&lt;br /&gt;
::*Manual entry can be done when adjusting inventory manually&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quote ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Quote&lt;br /&gt;
:Similar to entering an order, but starts as a quote&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quote to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if different from Quote to&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship Via&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if preference&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customer PO&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SalesPerson&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter items in Quote Lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::a. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::b. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::c. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and tab through&lt;br /&gt;
::::d. If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax Exempt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, uncheck box&lt;br /&gt;
::::e. Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create an Invoice – create invoice from current displayed quote&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create Order – create an order from currently displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
::*Copy Quote – copy quote to start a new quote with same information&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick List ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:From the Order Screen the pick list is created&lt;br /&gt;
:#Search to find specific Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Print Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Once items are physically picked, click Create AR Invoice(button)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Price List Report&lt;br /&gt;
:* Inventory Reorder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Physical Inventory Worksheet&lt;br /&gt;
:* See Insight Reporting for all available Inventory reports&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory&amp;diff=1241</id>
		<title>Screens:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory&amp;diff=1241"/>
		<updated>2024-04-08T21:02:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Tabs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
[https://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory-Assembly Inventory-Assembly]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Buttons==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1240</id>
		<title>Manual:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1240"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T16:44:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Screens&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reports==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inventory==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Main&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – main inventory item demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Assembly&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – parts assembly for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Process&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays operations attached to inventory record&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Product Builder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product builder for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitutions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product substitutions allowed for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Revisions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – records revisions to inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Serial Entry&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays serial numbers for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Images&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays/stores images for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – In-Stock Breakdown (different warehouse/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;POS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Point-of-Sale information for Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inv Tran History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays history for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Current Activity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays open orders and open pick lists containing inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Other History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays production run history&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Create Adj&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used when inventory is off after physical count&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Move&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (Location of inventory breakdown at different warehouses/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used to move inventory from one location to another&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Recalculate Prices&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Adjusts the price levels based on changes in markup, discount, or last cost&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Update Orders&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Updates existing orders in system if prices are recalculated&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Prints barcode from UPC field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Entry ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Add&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (this description will appear on Invoices, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Long Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if desired&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if categories are utilized&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Manufacturer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Drawing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if using blueprints&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rev&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays current revision from Revisions Tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GL Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The GL Group(s) that an invoice for this part will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Dimensions&lt;br /&gt;
::*Weight&lt;br /&gt;
::*Length&lt;br /&gt;
::*Width&lt;br /&gt;
::*Height&lt;br /&gt;
:12. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically adjusted when receiving in parts and fulfilling customer orders.&lt;br /&gt;
:13. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Desc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:14. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Minimum Stock&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Quantity to always be in stock (for purposes of reordering).&lt;br /&gt;
:15. Displays &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where parts are stocked&lt;br /&gt;
:16. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ctry of Origin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where the part came from&lt;br /&gt;
:17. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tariff Code&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The code that is used for International Sales codes from the United States International Trade Commission. Refer to the Harmonized Tariff Schedule of the United States for this information.&lt;br /&gt;
:18. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Reserve Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Specifies the quantity of this part that should always be in stock. For example, these parts may be required for production run purposes and should not be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
:19. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lead Days&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Indicates the number of days needed to order and receive the part from the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
:20. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cubic Feet&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:21. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gauge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:22. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Count Per Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The amount of individual parts per unit. For example, one unit may be a pallet of 15 individual parts, making the count per unit 15.&lt;br /&gt;
:23. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Color&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of part, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:24. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inventory Location Breakdown&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantity in stock at each location.&lt;br /&gt;
:25. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock by Lot/Serial#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantities in stock by serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
:26. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Price/Costs&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Retail Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is entered here. Price Levels can be set at different markups and discounts (applied from the last cost of the unit).&lt;br /&gt;
:27. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Extra Shipping&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be applied to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
:28. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sales Price/Start Date/End Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the sale price of the unit and when the sale starts and ends.&lt;br /&gt;
:29. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity Pricing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows minimum quantity of part to be purchased or special quantity pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
:30. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Suppliers/Customers Part#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows the different suppliers for the part, their part number, and minimum order quantity, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
:31. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Markup Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is applied if there is special pricing based on percentage. When a Markup Group is applied to a customer, the percentages are automatically calculated on customer orders as well as any quantity pricing discounts or minimum quantity requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
:32. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cost Change Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; when checked will auto-update (&amp;quot;recalc inventory item&amp;quot;) prices for the given inventory item when any inventory posting happens where the cost is changed.&lt;br /&gt;
:33. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last Cost Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is a stored value that displays the invoice date/time stamp of the last time the cost was updated (last inventory posting where cost was changed). See Field Help in Epiphany for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Transaction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically fulfilled when shipment or receipt is generated&lt;br /&gt;
::*Manual entry can be done when adjusting inventory manually&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quote ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Quote&lt;br /&gt;
:Similar to entering an order, but starts as a quote&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quote to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if different from Quote to&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship Via&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if preference&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customer PO&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SalesPerson&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter items in Quote Lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::a. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::b. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::c. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and tab through&lt;br /&gt;
::::d. If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax Exempt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, uncheck box&lt;br /&gt;
::::e. Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create an Invoice – create invoice from current displayed quote&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create Order – create an order from currently displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
::*Copy Quote – copy quote to start a new quote with same information&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick List ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:From the Order Screen the pick list is created&lt;br /&gt;
:#Search to find specific Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Print Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Once items are physically picked, click Create AR Invoice(button)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Price List Report&lt;br /&gt;
:* Inventory Reorder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Physical Inventory Worksheet&lt;br /&gt;
:* See Insight Reporting for all available Inventory reports&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Markup_Price_Group&amp;diff=1239</id>
		<title>Screens:Markup Price Group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Markup_Price_Group&amp;diff=1239"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T16:39:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: Created page with &amp;quot;Category:Configuration ==Tabs== ==Buttons==&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Configuration]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
==Buttons==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Configuration:Markup_Price_Group&amp;diff=1238</id>
		<title>Configuration:Markup Price Group</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Configuration:Markup_Price_Group&amp;diff=1238"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T16:22:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: Created page with &amp;quot;Category:Inventory ==Tabs== ==Buttons==&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
==Buttons==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1237</id>
		<title>Manual:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1237"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T16:19:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Screens&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reports==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inventory==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Main&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – main inventory item demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Assembly&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – parts assembly for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Process&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays operations attached to inventory record&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Product Builder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product builder for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitutions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product substitutions allowed for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Revisions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – records revisions to inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Serial Entry&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays serial numbers for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Images&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays/stores images for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – In-Stock Breakdown (different warehouse/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;POS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Point-of-Sale information for Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inv Tran History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays history for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Current Activity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays open orders and open pick lists containing inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Other History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays production run history&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Create Adj&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used when inventory is off after physical count&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Move&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (Location of inventory breakdown at different warehouses/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used to move inventory from one location to another&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Recalculate Prices&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Adjusts the price levels based on changes in markup, discount, or last cost&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Update Orders&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Updates existing orders in system if prices are recalculated&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Prints barcode from UPC field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Entry ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Add&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (this description will appear on Invoices, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Long Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if desired&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if categories are utilized&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Manufacturer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Drawing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if using blueprints&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rev&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays current revision from Revisions Tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GL Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The GL Group(s) that an invoice for this part will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Dimensions&lt;br /&gt;
::*Weight&lt;br /&gt;
::*Length&lt;br /&gt;
::*Width&lt;br /&gt;
::*Height&lt;br /&gt;
:12. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically adjusted when receiving in parts and fulfilling customer orders.&lt;br /&gt;
:13. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Desc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:14. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Minimum Stock&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Quantity to always be in stock (for purposes of reordering).&lt;br /&gt;
:15. Displays &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where parts are stocked&lt;br /&gt;
:16. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ctry of Origin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where the part came from&lt;br /&gt;
:17. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tariff Code&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The code that is used for International Sales codes from the United States International Trade Commission. Refer to the Harmonized Tariff Schedule of the United States for this information.&lt;br /&gt;
:18. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Reserve Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Specifies the quantity of this part that should always be in stock. For example, these parts may be required for production run purposes and should not be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
:19. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lead Days&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Indicates the number of days needed to order and receive the part from the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
:20. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cubic Feet&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:21. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gauge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:22. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Count Per Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The amount of individual parts per unit. For example, one unit may be a pallet of 15 individual parts, making the count per unit 15.&lt;br /&gt;
:23. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Color&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of part, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:24. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inventory Location Breakdown&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantity in stock at each location.&lt;br /&gt;
:25. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock by Lot/Serial#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantities in stock by serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
:26. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Price/Costs&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Retail Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is entered here. Price Levels can be set at different markups and discounts (applied from the last cost of the unit).&lt;br /&gt;
:27. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Extra Shipping&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be applied to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
:28. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sales Price/Start Date/End Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the sale price of the unit and when the sale starts and ends.&lt;br /&gt;
:29. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity Pricing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows minimum quantity of part to be purchased or special quantity pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
:30. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Suppliers/Customers Part#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows the different suppliers for the part, their part number, and minimum order quantity, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
:31. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Markup Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is applied if there is special pricing based on percentage. When a Markup Group is applied to a customer, the percentages are automatically calculated on customer orders as well as any quantity pricing discounts or minimum quantity requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
:32. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cost Change Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; when checked will auto-update (&amp;quot;recalc inventory item&amp;quot;) prices for the given inventory item when any inventory posting happens where the cost is changed.&lt;br /&gt;
:33. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last Cost Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is a stored value that displays the invoice date/time stamp of the last time the cost was updated (last inventory posting where cost was changed). See Field Help in Epiphany for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Transaction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically fulfilled when shipment or receipt is generated&lt;br /&gt;
::*Manual entry can be done when adjusting inventory manually&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quote ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Quote&lt;br /&gt;
:Similar to entering an order, but starts as a quote&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quote to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if different from Quote to&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship Via&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if preference&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customer PO&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SalesPerson&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter items in Quote Lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::a. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::b. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::c. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and tab through&lt;br /&gt;
::::d. If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax Exempt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, uncheck box&lt;br /&gt;
::::e. Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create an Invoice – create invoice from current displayed quote&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create Order – create an order from currently displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
::*Copy Quote – copy quote to start a new quote with same information&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick List ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:From the Order Screen the pick list is created&lt;br /&gt;
:#Search to find specific Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Print Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Once items are physically picked, click Create AR Invoice(button)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Price List Report&lt;br /&gt;
:* Inventory Reorder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Physical Inventory Worksheet&lt;br /&gt;
:* See Insight Reporting for all available Inventory reports&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1236</id>
		<title>Manual:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1236"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T15:56:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Screens&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reports==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inventory==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Main&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – main inventory item demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Assembly&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – parts assembly for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Process&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays operations attached to inventory record&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Product Builder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product builder for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitutions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product substitutions allowed for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Revisions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – records revisions to inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Serial Entry&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays serial numbers for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Images&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays/stores images for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – In-Stock Breakdown (different warehouse/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;POS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Point-of-Sale information for Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inv Tran History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays history for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Current Activity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays open orders and open pick lists containing inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Other History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays production run history&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Create Adj&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used when inventory is off after physical count&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Move&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (Location of inventory breakdown at different warehouses/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used to move inventory from one location to another&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Recalculate Prices&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Adjusts the price levels based on changes in markup, discount, or last cost&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Update Orders&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Updates existing orders in system if prices are recalculated&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Prints barcode from UPC field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Entry ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Add&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (this description will appear on Invoices, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Long Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if desired&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if categories are utilized&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Manufacturer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Drawing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if using blueprints&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rev&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays current revision from Revisions Tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GL Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The GL Group(s) that an invoice for this part will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Dimensions&lt;br /&gt;
::*Weight&lt;br /&gt;
::*Length&lt;br /&gt;
::*Width&lt;br /&gt;
::*Height&lt;br /&gt;
:12. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically adjusted when receiving in parts and fulfilling customer orders.&lt;br /&gt;
:13. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Desc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:14. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Minimum Stock&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Quantity to always be in stock (for purposes of reordering).&lt;br /&gt;
:15. Displays &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where parts are stocked&lt;br /&gt;
:16. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ctry of Origin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where the part came from&lt;br /&gt;
:17. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tariff Code&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The code that is used for International Sales codes from the United States International Trade Commission. Refer to the Harmonized Tariff Schedule of the United States for this information.&lt;br /&gt;
:18. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Reserve Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Specifies the quantity of this part that should always be in stock. For example, these parts may be required for production run purposes and should not be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
:19. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lead Days&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Indicates the number of days needed to order and receive the part from the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
:20. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cubic Feet&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:21. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gauge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:22. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Count Per Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The amount of individual parts per unit. For example, one unit may be a pallet of 15 individual parts, making the count per unit 15.&lt;br /&gt;
:23. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Color&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of part, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:24. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inventory Location Breakdown&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantity in stock at each location.&lt;br /&gt;
:25. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock by Lot/Serial#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantities in stock by serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
:26. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Price/Costs&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Retail Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is entered here. Price Levels can be set at different markups and discounts (applied from the last cost of the unit).&lt;br /&gt;
:27. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Extra Shipping&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be applied to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
:28. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sales Price/Start Date/End Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the sale price of the unit and when the sale starts and ends.&lt;br /&gt;
:29. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity Pricing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows minimum quantity of part to be purchased or special quantity pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
:30. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Suppliers/Customers Part#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows the different suppliers for the part, their part number, and minimum order quantity, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
:31. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Markup Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is applied if there is special pricing based on percentage. When a Markup Group is applied to a customer, the percentages are automatically calculated on customer orders as well as any quantity pricing discounts or minimum quantity requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
:32. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cost Change Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; when checked will auto-update (&amp;quot;recalc inventory item&amp;quot;) prices for the given inventory item when any inventory posting happens where the cost is changed.&lt;br /&gt;
:33. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last Cost Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is a stored value that displays the invoice date/time stamp of the last time the cost was updated (last inventory posting where cost was changed). See Field Help in Epiphany for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Transaction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically fulfilled when shipment or receipt is generated&lt;br /&gt;
::*Manual entry can be done when adjusting inventory manually&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quote ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Quote&lt;br /&gt;
:Similar to entering an order, but starts as a quote&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quote to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if different from Quote to&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship Via&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if preference&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customer PO&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SalesPerson&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter items in Quote Lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::a. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::b. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::c. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and tab through&lt;br /&gt;
::::d. If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax Exempt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, uncheck box&lt;br /&gt;
::::e. Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create an Invoice – create invoice from current displayed quote&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create Order – create an order from currently displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
::*Copy Quote – copy quote to start a new quote with same information&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick List ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:From the Order Screen the pick list is created&lt;br /&gt;
:#Search to find specific Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Print Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Once items are physically picked, click Create AR Invoice(button)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Price List Report&lt;br /&gt;
:* Inventory Reorder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Physical Inventory Worksheet&lt;br /&gt;
:* See Insight Reporting for all available Inventory reports&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1235</id>
		<title>Manual:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1235"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T15:49:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Screens&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reports==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inventory==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Main&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – main inventory item demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Assembly&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – parts assembly for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Process&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays operations attached to inventory record&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Product Builder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product builder for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitutions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product substitutions allowed for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Revisions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – records revisions to inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Serial Entry&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays serial numbers for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Images&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays/stores images for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – In-Stock Breakdown (different warehouse/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;POS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Point-of-Sale information for Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inv Tran History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays history for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Current Activity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays open orders and open pick lists containing inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Other History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays production run history&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Create Adj&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used when inventory is off after physical count&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Move&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (Location of inventory breakdown at different warehouses/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used to move inventory from one location to another&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Recalculate Prices&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Adjusts the price levels based on changes in markup, discount, or last cost&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Update Orders&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Updates existing orders in system if prices are recalculated&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Prints barcode from UPC field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Entry ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Add&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (this description will appear on Invoices, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Long Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if desired&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if categories are utilized&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Manufacturer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Drawing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if using blueprints&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rev&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays current revision from Revisions Tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GL Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The GL Group(s) that an invoice for this part will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Dimensions&lt;br /&gt;
::*Weight&lt;br /&gt;
::*Length&lt;br /&gt;
::*Width&lt;br /&gt;
::*Height&lt;br /&gt;
:12. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically adjusted when receiving in parts and fulfilling customer orders.&lt;br /&gt;
:13. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Desc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:14. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Minimum Stock&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Quantity to always be in stock (for purposes of reordering).&lt;br /&gt;
:15. Displays &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where parts are stocked&lt;br /&gt;
:16. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ctry of Origin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where the part came from&lt;br /&gt;
:17. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tariff Code&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The code that is used for International Sales codes from the United States International Trade Commission. Refer to the Harmonized Tariff Schedule of the United States for this information.&lt;br /&gt;
:18. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Reserve Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Specifies the quantity of this part that should always be in stock. For example, these parts may be required for production run purposes and should not be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
:19. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lead Days&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Indicates the number of days needed to order and receive the part from the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
:20. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cubic Feet&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:21. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gauge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:22. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Count Per Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The amount of individual parts per unit. For example, one unit may be a pallet of 15 individual parts, making the count per unit 15.&lt;br /&gt;
:23. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Color&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of part, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:24. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inventory Location Breakdown&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantity in stock at each location.&lt;br /&gt;
:25. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock by Lot/Serial#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantities in stock by serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
:26. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Price/Costs&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Retail Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is entered here. Price Levels can be set at different markups and discounts (applied from the last cost of the unit).&lt;br /&gt;
:27. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Extra Shipping&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be applied to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
:28. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sales Price/Start Date/End Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the sale price of the unit and when the sale starts and ends.&lt;br /&gt;
:29. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity Pricing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows minimum quantity of part to be purchased or special quantity pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
:30. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Suppliers/Customers Part#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows the different suppliers for the part, their part number, and minimum order quantity, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
:31. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Markup Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is applied if there is special pricing based on percentage. When a Markup Group is applied to a customer, the percentages are automatically calculated on customer orders as well as any quantity pricing discounts or minimum quantity requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
:32. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cost Change Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; when checked will auto-update (&amp;quot;recalc inventory item&amp;quot;) prices for the given inventory item when any inventory posting happens where the cost is changed.&lt;br /&gt;
:33. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last Cost Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is a stored value that displays the invoice date/time stamp of the last time the cost was updated (last inventory posting where cost was changed). See Field Help in Epiphany for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Transaction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically fulfilled when shipment or receipt is generated&lt;br /&gt;
::*Manual entry can be done when adjusting inventory manually&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quote ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Quote&lt;br /&gt;
:Similar to entering an order, but starts as a quote&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quote to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if different from Quote to&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship Via&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if preference&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customer PO&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SalesPerson&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter items in Quote Lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::a. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::b. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::c. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and tab through&lt;br /&gt;
::::d. If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax Exempt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, uncheck box&lt;br /&gt;
::::e. Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create an Invoice – create invoice from current displayed quote&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create Order – create an order from currently displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
::*Copy Quote – copy quote to start a new quote with same information&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick List ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:From the Order Screen the pick list is created&lt;br /&gt;
:#Search to find specific Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Print Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Once items are physically picked, click Create AR Invoice(button)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Price List Report&lt;br /&gt;
:* Inventory Reorder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Physical Inventory Worksheet&lt;br /&gt;
:* See Insight Reporting for all available Inventory reports&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1234</id>
		<title>Manual:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1234"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T15:49:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Screens&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reports==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inventory==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Main&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – main inventory item demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Assembly&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – parts assembly for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Process&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays operations attached to inventory record&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Product Builder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product builder for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitutions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product substitutions allowed for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Revisions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – records revisions to inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Serial Entry&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays serial numbers for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Images&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays/stores images for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – In-Stock Breakdown (different warehouse/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;POS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Point-of-Sale information for Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inv Tran History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays history for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Current Activity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays open orders and open pick lists containing inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Other History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays production run history&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Create Adj&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used when inventory is off after physical count&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Move&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (Location of inventory breakdown at different warehouses/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used to move inventory from one location to another&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Recalculate Prices&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Adjusts the price levels based on changes in markup, discount, or last cost&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Update Orders&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Updates existing orders in system if prices are recalculated&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Prints barcode from UPC field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Entry ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Add&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (this description will appear on Invoices, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Long Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if desired&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if categories are utilized&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Manufacturer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Drawing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if using blueprints&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rev&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays current revision from Revisions Tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GL Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The GL Group(s) that an invoice for this part will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Dimensions&lt;br /&gt;
::*Weight&lt;br /&gt;
::*Length&lt;br /&gt;
::*Width&lt;br /&gt;
::*Height&lt;br /&gt;
:12. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically adjusted when receiving in parts and fulfilling customer orders.&lt;br /&gt;
:13. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Desc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:14. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Minimum Stock&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Quantity to always be in stock (for purposes of reordering).&lt;br /&gt;
:15. Displays &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where parts are stocked&lt;br /&gt;
:16. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ctry of Origin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where the part came from&lt;br /&gt;
:17. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tariff Code&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The code that is used for International Sales codes from the United States International Trade Commission. Refer to the Harmonized Tariff Schedule of the United States for this information.&lt;br /&gt;
:18. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Reserve Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Specifies the quantity of this part that should always be in stock. For example, these parts may be required for production run purposes and should not be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
:19. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lead Days&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Indicates the number of days needed to order and receive the part from the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
:20. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cubic Feet&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:21. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gauge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:22. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Count Per Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The amount of individual parts per unit. For example, one unit may be a pallet of 15 individual parts, making the count per unit 15.&lt;br /&gt;
:23. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Color&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of part, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:24. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inventory Location Breakdown&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantity in stock at each location.&lt;br /&gt;
:25. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock by Lot/Serial#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantities in stock by serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
:26. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Price/Costs&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Retail Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is entered here. Price Levels can be set at different markups and discounts (applied from the last cost of the unit).&lt;br /&gt;
:27. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Extra Shipping&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be applied to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
:28. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sales Price/Start Date/End Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the sale price of the unit and when the sale starts and ends.&lt;br /&gt;
:29. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity Pricing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows minimum quantity of part to be purchased or special quantity pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
:30. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Suppliers/Customers Part#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows the different suppliers for the part, their part number, and minimum order quantity, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
:31. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Markup Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is applied if there is special pricing based on percentage. When a Markup Group is applied to a customer, the percentages are automatically calculated on customer orders as well as any quantity pricing discounts or minimum quantity requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
:32. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cost Change Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; when checked will auto-update (&amp;quot;recalc inventory item&amp;quot;) prices for the given inventory item when any inventory posting happens where the cost is changed.&lt;br /&gt;
:33. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last Cost Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is a stored value that displays the invoice date/time stamp of the last time the cost was updated (last inventory posting where cost was changed). See Field Help in Epiphany for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Transaction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically fulfilled when shipment or receipt is generated&lt;br /&gt;
::*Manual entry can be done when adjusting inventory manually&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quote ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Quote&lt;br /&gt;
:Similar to entering an order, but starts as a quote&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quote to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if different from Quote to&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship Via&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if preference&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customer PO&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SalesPerson&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter items in Quote Lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::a. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::b. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::c. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and tab through&lt;br /&gt;
::::d. If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax Exempt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, uncheck box&lt;br /&gt;
::::e. Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create an Invoice – create invoice from current displayed quote&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create Order – create an order from currently displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
::*Copy Quote – copy quote to start a new quote with same information&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick List ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:From the Order Screen the pick list is created&lt;br /&gt;
:#Search to find specific Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Print Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Once items are physically picked, click Create AR Invoice(button)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Price List Report&lt;br /&gt;
:* Inventory Reorder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Physical Inventory Worksheet&lt;br /&gt;
:* See Insight Reporting for all available Inventory reports&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1233</id>
		<title>Manual:Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Inventory&amp;diff=1233"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T15:48:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Applications]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Screens&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reports==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inventory==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
:Tabs&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Main&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – main inventory item demographics&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Assembly&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – parts assembly for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Process&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays operations attached to inventory record&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Product Builder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product builder for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitutions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – product substitutions allowed for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Revisions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – records revisions to inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Serial Entry&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays serial numbers for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Images&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays/stores images for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – In-Stock Breakdown (different warehouse/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;POS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Point-of-Sale information for Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inv Tran History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays history for inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Current Activity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays open orders and open pick lists containing inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Other History&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – displays production run history&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons (Main Tab)&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Create Adj&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used when inventory is off after physical count&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Move&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (Location of inventory breakdown at different warehouses/locations)&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Used to move inventory from one location to another&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Recalculate Prices&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Adjusts the price levels based on changes in markup, discount, or last cost&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Update Orders&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Updates existing orders in system if prices are recalculated&lt;br /&gt;
::*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Print UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::*Prints barcode from UPC field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Entry ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Add&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Part Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (this description will appear on Invoices, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Long Description&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if desired&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if categories are utilized&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Manufacturer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Drawing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if using blueprints&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rev&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays current revision from Revisions Tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;UPC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GL Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The GL Group(s) that an invoice for this part will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
:11. Dimensions&lt;br /&gt;
::*Weight&lt;br /&gt;
::*Length&lt;br /&gt;
::*Width&lt;br /&gt;
::*Height&lt;br /&gt;
:12. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically adjusted when receiving in parts and fulfilling customer orders.&lt;br /&gt;
:13. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Desc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:14. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Minimum Stock&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Quantity to always be in stock (for purposes of reordering).&lt;br /&gt;
:15. Displays &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Locations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where parts are stocked&lt;br /&gt;
:16. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ctry of Origin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of where the part came from&lt;br /&gt;
:17. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tariff Code&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The code that is used for International Sales codes from the United States International Trade Commission. Refer to the Harmonized Tariff Schedule of the United States for this information.&lt;br /&gt;
:18. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Reserve Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Specifies the quantity of this part that should always be in stock. For example, these parts may be required for production run purposes and should not be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
:19. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lead Days&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*Indicates the number of days needed to order and receive the part from the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
:20. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cubic Feet&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:21. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gauge&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:22. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Count Per Qty&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::*The amount of individual parts per unit. For example, one unit may be a pallet of 15 individual parts, making the count per unit 15.&lt;br /&gt;
:23. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Color&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of part, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:24. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Inventory Location Breakdown&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantity in stock at each location.&lt;br /&gt;
:25. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In Stock by Lot/Serial#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the quantities in stock by serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
:26. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Price/Costs&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Retail Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is entered here. Price Levels can be set at different markups and discounts (applied from the last cost of the unit).&lt;br /&gt;
:27. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Extra Shipping&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be applied to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
:28. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sales Price/Start Date/End Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; displays the sale price of the unit and when the sale starts and ends.&lt;br /&gt;
:29. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity Pricing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows minimum quantity of part to be purchased or special quantity pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
:30. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Suppliers/Customers Part#&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; shows the different suppliers for the part, their part number, and minimum order quantity, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
:31. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Markup Group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is applied if there is special pricing based on percentage. When a Markup Group is applied to a customer, the percentages are automatically calculated on customer orders as well as any quantity pricing discounts or minimum quantity requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
:32. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Cost Change Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; when checked will auto-update (&amp;quot;recalc inventory item&amp;quot;) prices for the given inventory item when any inventory posting happens where the cost is changed.&lt;br /&gt;
:33. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last Cost Date&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is a stored value that displays the invoice date/time stamp of the last time the cost was updated (last inventory posting where cost was changed). See Field Help in Epiphany for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Transaction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
::*Automatically fulfilled when shipment or receipt is generated&lt;br /&gt;
::*Manual entry can be done when adjusting inventory manually&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quote ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Quote&lt;br /&gt;
:Similar to entering an order, but starts as a quote&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quote to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Company&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship to&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if different from Quote to&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Ship Via&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; if preference&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Customer PO&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SalesPerson&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
:#Enter items in Quote Lines&lt;br /&gt;
::::a. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::b. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Quantity&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::c. Enter &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Unit Price&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and tab through&lt;br /&gt;
::::d. If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tax Exempt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, uncheck box&lt;br /&gt;
::::e. Click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Buttons&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create an Invoice – create invoice from current displayed quote&lt;br /&gt;
::*Create Order – create an order from currently displayed order&lt;br /&gt;
::*Copy Quote – copy quote to start a new quote with same information&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick List ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location:&#039;&#039;&#039; Inventory / Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:From the Order Screen the pick list is created&lt;br /&gt;
:#Search to find specific Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Print Pick List&lt;br /&gt;
:#Once items are physically picked, click Create AR Invoice(button)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Price List Report&lt;br /&gt;
:* Inventory Reorder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Physical Inventory Worksheet&lt;br /&gt;
:* See Insight Reporting for all available Inventory reports&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory_-_Assembly&amp;diff=1232</id>
		<title>Screens:Inventory - Assembly</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory_-_Assembly&amp;diff=1232"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T15:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: Pamm moved page Screens:Inventory - Assembly to Screens:Inventory-Assembly&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Screens:Inventory-Assembly]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory-Assembly&amp;diff=1231</id>
		<title>Screens:Inventory-Assembly</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory-Assembly&amp;diff=1231"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T15:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: Pamm moved page Screens:Inventory - Assembly to Screens:Inventory-Assembly&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
==Buttons==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory-Assembly&amp;diff=1230</id>
		<title>Screens:Inventory-Assembly</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Inventory-Assembly&amp;diff=1230"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T15:37:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: Created page with &amp;quot;Category:Inventory ==Tabs== ==Buttons==&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
==Buttons==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1229</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1229"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T15:31:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: /* Screens */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Epiphany Logo.png|frameless|center|Epiphany]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Welcome to Epiphany!&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Here you will find everything you need to understand Epiphany.&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;We are in the process of restructuring our Epiphany Wiki. If you have trouble finding something, please contact Support at 608.554.2846.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basics ==&lt;br /&gt;
Foundational documentation about Epiphany basic operations.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Basics&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|mode=category&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=titlewithoutnamespace&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=4&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-4-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applications ==&lt;br /&gt;
Main Epiphany applications.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Applications&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|mode=category&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=titlewithoutnamespace&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=4&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-4-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SubSystems ==&lt;br /&gt;
Epiphany subsystems that are used across multiple applications.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Subsystems&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|mode=category&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=titlewithoutnamespace&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=4&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-4-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Postings ==&lt;br /&gt;
Posting articles describe the automated processes that occur while saving more complicated documents.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Postings&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mobile App ==&lt;br /&gt;
Documentation concerning the Epiphany Android and IPhone apps.&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=MobileApp&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
---------------------------------------------------------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deprecated and yet-to-be re-organized documentation is below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How-To ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=HowTo&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;[https://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;amp;action=purge Purge cache of the Main Page]&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Person&amp;diff=1228</id>
		<title>Screens:Person</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Screens:Person&amp;diff=1228"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T15:30:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Demographics]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
==Buttons==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&lt;br /&gt;
Edit all person records, including all contacts, employees, and Epiphany users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Epiphany uses central Person table for all people used in the system, regardless of their type or purpose.  A single person entry on this screen can represent a contact, a customer, a vendor, an employee, and an Epiphany User Account all at the same time.  It is strongly recommended that you have only a single person record for every real person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen contains a large number of tabs, representing both additional database information that can be completed for the person and common historical information about the person, like AR/AP/Inventory history.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;clear:both;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==Fields==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Fields in red are critical.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:;&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Last Name&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Leaving this field blank will make searching difficult and reports harder to read, but it can be left blank if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:;&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;First Name&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Leaving this field blank will make searching difficult and reports harder to read, but it can be left blank if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
:;&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Employee&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::This is a flag indicating if this person is an employee of not.  If they are marked as an employee, they will be visible from the Employee screen, otherwise they will not.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Birthdate&lt;br /&gt;
::This is purely informational.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Sex&lt;br /&gt;
::This is purely informational.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Category&lt;br /&gt;
::link to category(ies) for data filtering and categorizing&lt;br /&gt;
:;Active Flag&lt;br /&gt;
::Active is the default when adding a new person; uncheck this box if person becomes inactive&lt;br /&gt;
:;Contact Information&lt;br /&gt;
::;Address information (Street, City, State and Zip)&lt;br /&gt;
:::Default mailing address information for the person.  More specific addresses can be found on the Addresses Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
::;Email Addresses and descriptions&lt;br /&gt;
:::Email Addresses are used when Epiphany needs to send email notifications of any sort to a person.&lt;br /&gt;
::;Phone numbers and descriptions&lt;br /&gt;
:::Multiple phone numbers can be listed, prioritized, and marked as &amp;quot;Private&amp;quot;.  Private phone numbers are hidden from view for unauthorized users on the web-based phone directory.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Company Affiliations(Company/Position)&lt;br /&gt;
::link related person to company and position&lt;br /&gt;
:;Family&lt;br /&gt;
::link family members to related person record&lt;br /&gt;
:;Photo&lt;br /&gt;
::insert photo image of person&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Functions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:;[[File:OutlookSync.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
::Turns on Outlook Sync to sync this record to your Outlook Contacts.  The outlook sync feature requires configuration of the Epiphany Background Process windows service.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Fingerprint&lt;br /&gt;
::Register person’s fingerprints with compatible fingerprint device.  This is an old deprecated authentication feature.&lt;br /&gt;
:::[[File:FingerprintRegistration.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
:;Send&lt;br /&gt;
::Opens a new blank email and places the person&#039;s email addresses in the “To” field. It requires compatible email client software.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Print Label&lt;br /&gt;
::Prints an address label to compatible printer for the current person.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Print (Filtered)&lt;br /&gt;
::This only works when you have filtered the person screen.  Then it will print address labels for all person records included in the current filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
===Addresses===&lt;br /&gt;
Displays all addresses related to person record&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:;Default Address&lt;br /&gt;
::This is just another place to edit the same address that is on the main Person Tab.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Bill To&lt;br /&gt;
::This address will be used on AR Invoices as the Bill To Address.  If left blank, the Default Address will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Ship To&lt;br /&gt;
::This address will be used on AR Invoices as the Ship To Address.  If left blank, the Default Address will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Remit To&lt;br /&gt;
::This address will be used on AP Checks.  If left blank, the Default Address will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Email Address From&lt;br /&gt;
::When this person is logged in as an Epiphany user and sends and Email, this address will be used as the From address.  If left blank, the users regular EMail address will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Email Reply To&lt;br /&gt;
::When this person is logged in as an Epiphany user and sends and Email, this address will be used as the Reply To address.  If left blank, the address being used as the &amp;quot;From&amp;quot; address will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
:;Owner of&lt;br /&gt;
::This is the address of any properties owned by this person.  This field can be used independently, but is primarily here as a reverse cross-reference to the detailed address screens, that allow the assignment of an owner for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other===&lt;br /&gt;
Additional information related to person record&lt;br /&gt;
===Security===&lt;br /&gt;
security credentials and level of access rights to Epiphany &lt;br /&gt;
===Credit Card===&lt;br /&gt;
stores credit card information for billing&lt;br /&gt;
===Inv History===&lt;br /&gt;
displays invoice history related to person record &lt;br /&gt;
===AR History===&lt;br /&gt;
displays AR history related to person record &lt;br /&gt;
===AR Payments===&lt;br /&gt;
displays AR payments related to person record &lt;br /&gt;
===AP History===&lt;br /&gt;
displays the AP invoices related to person record&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Orders===&lt;br /&gt;
displays open order in Epiphany related to person record &lt;br /&gt;
===Class Entry===&lt;br /&gt;
displays classes related to person record &lt;br /&gt;
===Class History===&lt;br /&gt;
displays history of classes attended &lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
displays any activity logs related to person record&lt;br /&gt;
===Acct Defaults===&lt;br /&gt;
displays the default billing options related to person record&lt;br /&gt;
===Security Basic===&lt;br /&gt;
displays basic security to allow for password resets&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Demographics&amp;diff=1227</id>
		<title>Manual:Demographics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://epiphanywiki.crystalcomputer.com/index.php?title=Manual:Demographics&amp;diff=1227"/>
		<updated>2024-03-29T15:28:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pamm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Subsystems]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
{{#dpl:&lt;br /&gt;
category=Demographics&lt;br /&gt;
|columns=3&lt;br /&gt;
|namespace=Screens&lt;br /&gt;
|shownamespace=false&lt;br /&gt;
|ordermethod=title&lt;br /&gt;
|order=ascending&lt;br /&gt;
|format=&amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;list-3-columns&amp;quot;&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[%NAMESPACE%:%TITLE%|%TITLE%]],&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;,&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reports==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pamm</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>